2015 Nissan Titan | Owner`s Manual | Nissan USA

2015 Nissan Titan | Owner`s Manual | Nissan USA
®
2015
TITAN
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Owner’s Manual Supplement
The information contained within this supplement replaces and revises the following information in the 2015 Titan Owner’s Manual:
● Front passenger air bag and status light in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of the Owner’s Manual
● Towing your vehicle in the “In case of emergency” section of the Owner’s Manual
Read carefully and keep in vehicle.
Printing: May 2015 (02)
Publication No. SU15EA 0A60U1
Status light
The right front passenger air bag status
light
is located under the climate controls.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
position, the front passenger air bag status light
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off or operates depending on the front passenger seat occupied
status. The light operates as follows:
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
light is OFF and the front passenger air bag
is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
LRS0865
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The light
is OFF to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The right front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below
in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor). It is in the bottom of the
right front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the
right front seat by weight. It works together with
seat belt sensors described in this section. For
example, if a child is in the right front passenger
seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed
to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance
with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its
weight and the child’s weight can be detected
and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant
classification sensor operation can vary depending on the right front passenger seat belt sensors.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
System determines whether the front passenger
air bag should be automatically turned OFF, as
required by the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF; however, if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the
most effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child
restraints” in this section for proper use and installation.
If the right front passenger seat is not occupied
the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in
a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the right front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, will
blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
● If your vehicle has front recovery hooks
as original factory equipment do not
remove or modify them. If it was not
equipped with front recovery hooks do
not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of the front airbag
system resulting in injury or death.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor).
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and
local regulations for towing must be followed.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage your
vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to
prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,
NISSAN recommends having a service operator
tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
● If your vehicle has front recovery hooks
as original factory equipment do not
remove or modify them. If it was not
equipped with front recovery hooks do
not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of the front airbag
system resulting in injury or death.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “Technical and Consumer
Information” section of this manual.
FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, and clarify your
rights under your state’s lemon law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
proper use of such accessories prior to operating
the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN
dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive
mark is placed at the beginmodels, a
ning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss of
control or a collision. For additional information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, refer to “Onpavement and off-road driving
precautions,” “Avoiding collision and
rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety or durability and may
even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may
not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
This manual includes information for all features
and equipment available on this model. Features
and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order,
date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on
your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with the
most accurate information currently available.
Please carefully read and retain with this manual
all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to
ensure you have access to accurate and up-todate information regarding your vehicle. Current
versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner section
of
the
NISSAN
website
at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s
Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See
the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
page in this Owner’s Manual for contact information.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.
APD1005
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription
after trial period and
are sold separately or
as a package. The
satellite service is
available only in the
48 contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM
satellite service is
also available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
© 2014 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical and consumer information
9
Index
10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
Rear seat belts (P. 1-14)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-14)
4. Front-seat Active Head Restraints
5. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-50)
6. Seats (P. 1-2)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-59)
8. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-50)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-25)
11. Top tether strap anchor point (P. 1-25)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2021
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-11)
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-30)
3. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-14)
4. Power windows (P. 2-54)
5. Door locks, key fob, keys (P. 3-3, 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-16)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)
8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
9. Tire chains (P. 8-34)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
11. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-32)
12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-32)
13. Recovery hooks (if so equipped)
(P. 6-14)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2228
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rear sliding window (if so equipped)
(P. 2-54)
Vehicle loading (P. 9-15)
Tailgate (P. 3-21)
Trailer hitch/towing (if so equipped)
(P. 9-25)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Lockable bedside storage compartment
(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)
Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-11, P. 9-46)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-11)
Child safety rear door lock
(if so equipped) (P. 3-3)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2229
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
DVD entertainment system
(if so equipped) (P. 4-69)
Power moonroof (if so equipped)
(P. 2-58)
Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-61)
Sun visors (P. 3-15)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)
Glove box (P. 2-46)
Cup holders (P. 2-46)
Front seats (P. 1-2)
Folding rear bench seat (P. 1-2)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII0029
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
LIC2437
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Vents (P. 4-15)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-32)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-27)
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-36)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-50, P. 2-37)
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)
Shift lever (column) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-14)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-30)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-4)
Climate controls (P. 4-15, P. 4-24)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
Glove box (P. 2-48)
Storage tray (P. 2-46)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-59)
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-38)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (P. 2-39)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-42)
Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-39)
Shift lever (console) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-14)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-29)
Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)
Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-38)/Rear sonar system off switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)/Pedal position adjustment switch (if so equipped)
(P. 3-14)/Rear power window switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-57)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Battery (P. 8-15)
Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
6. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
7. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
10. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI2482
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
or
Name
Page
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light
2-13
Automatic transmission check warning
light
2-13
Automatic transmission park warning
light (
model)
2-13
Brake warning light
2-13
or
Charge warning
light
Warning
light
Name
Page
Engine oil pressure
low/engine coolant
temperature high
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-14
4WD warning light
(
model)
2-15
Low fuel warning
light
2-15
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-15
Low windshieldwasher fluid warning
light
2-17
Master warning light
2-17
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-17
Warning
light
Name
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-17
Page
Electronic locking
rear differential (ELock) system on
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-18
Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-18
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-18
High beam indicator
light (Blue)
2-18
2-14
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Indicator
light
Name
Page
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
2-18
Security indicator
light (if so equipped)
2-19
Slip indicator light
2-19
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-19
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off
indicator light
2-19
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
MEMO
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual bench seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Armrests (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head restraints/Headrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Three-point type seat belt with retractor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Two-point type seat belt without retractor
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts — front passenger and
rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts — front bench center
position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
SEATS
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
ARS1152
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on
seat belt usage” in this section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
LRS2575
FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Forward and backward
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
LRS0427
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants
to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park).
LRS0633
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic
drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual for automatic
drive positioner operation.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0164
LRS0425
LRS2637
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat
cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable
lower back support to the driver. Push the switch
forward or backward to adjust the seatback lumbar area.
Front bench seat
ARMRESTS (if so equipped)
To use the center armrest on the bench seats,
pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it
down to the resting position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
LRS2576
Rear bench seat
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear
before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet
to get caught or pinched in the seat.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide
significant protection against injury in
an accident. Always replace and adjust
them properly if they have been removed for any reason.
● If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be
securely stored to prevent them from
causing injury to passengers or damage
to the vehicle in case of sudden braking
or an accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
LRS2577
Folding the rear bench seat up
To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capacity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking
tools from the storage area:
1. Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the
seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion up.
LRS2578
LRS2579
2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward
the back of the vehicle until it locks in place.
3. Repeat this process to raise and secure the
seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle
for maximum storage capacity.
To return the rear bench seat to a seating position, reverse the process. Make sure to properly push the seat cushion down into place.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
WARNING
WARNING
● When the vehicle is being used to carry
cargo, properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do
not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear
seat unless the seat bottom cushions
are in place and latched.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas by
passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0920
Folding the rear bench seat down
The rear bench seat can be tilted forward to
access the child restraint anchor point locations.
1
To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up 䊊
and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor
2 can be accessed behind the rear
points 䊊
bench seatback.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything
to the head restraint/headrest stalks or
remove the head restraint/headrest. Do
not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed. If
the head restraint/headrest was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of
the
head
restraints/headrests. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
LRS2020
Folding front seat
LRS2633
Front bucket seat
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
● Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated,
adjustable or non-adjustable.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have
multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock
them in a desired adjustment position.
● The
non-adjustable
head
restraints/headrests have a single locking
notch to secure them to the seat frame.
● Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
2. Multiple notches
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
3. Lock knob
2. Single notch
4. Stalks
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant uses
the seating position.
LRS2302
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the
highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from
the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in
a secure place so it is not loose in the
vehicle.
LRS2303
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with
the holes in the seat. Make sure that the
head restraint/headrest is facing the correct
direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
1 must be installed in the hole with the lock
䊊
2 .
knob 䊊
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest
before an occupant uses the seating position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
WRS0134
LRS2351
LRS2305
ADJUST
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Raise
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center
is level with the center of your ears. If your ear
position is still higher than the recommended
alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at
the highest position.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
● Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair
active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward utilizing
the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch
before riding in that designated seating position.
SPA1025
FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section. Failure
to do so can reduce the effectiveness of
the active head restraint.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active head restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints as described in this section.
● Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
SEAT BELTS
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories specify that seat belts be worn at
all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0134
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
SSS0016
WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
the seat belt is not worn properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
SSS0014
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal injury.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Removal and installation of pretensioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision by a
NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends
that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show
no damage and continue to operate
properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are
equipped with a seat belt warning light. The
warning light, located on the instrument panel,
will show the status of the driver and passenger
seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light
will not light up if the seat is not occupied.
For
additional
information,
refer
to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to
release the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
LRS0607
Power front seat shown
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,
refer to “Seats” in this section.
WRS0137
2
䊊
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0138
3
䊊
4
䊊
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and
retract to allow the driver and passengers some
freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks
the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly
or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the
seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional
information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured
in the latched position. If they are not
completely secured, passengers may be
injured in an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
1
䊊
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
LRS0242
Front seats
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
outboard seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional
information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt
1 the
usage” in this section. To adjust, pull out 䊊
adjustment button and move the shoulder belt
2 to the desired position, so the belt
anchor 䊊
passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0642
TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITHOUT RETRACTOR (if so
equipped)
SPA1347A
Selecting the correct set of seat belts
The center seat belt buckle and tongue are iden1 . The center seat
tified by the CENTER mark 䊊
belt tongue can only be fastened into the center
seat belt buckle.
LRS0643
Fastening the seat belts
1
䊊
Insert the tongue into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
LRS0644
2
䊊
Tighten the belt by pulling the free end of the
belt away from the tongue.
LRS0645
3
䊊
Position the lap belt low and snug on the
hips as illustrated.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0646
4
䊊
Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at a
right angle to the belt, then pull on the belt.
WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
LRS0647
Unfastening the seat belts
1 on
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button 䊊
the buckle.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available for purchase.
The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat
belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt
becomes wrapped around a child’s neck
with the ALR mode activated, the child can
be seriously injured or killed if the seat
belt retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If
the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by
cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
(such as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraints
● Forward-facing child restraints
● Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The lap
belt may not fit over their small hip bones.
In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
belt could cause serious or fatal injury.
Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
seat belt. For additional information, refer to
“Child restraints” in this section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental restraint system (SRS)” in
this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
child restraint as long as possible up to the height
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. NISSAN
recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child
restraint manufacturer.
properly, the booster seat should raise the child
so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of
the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
a label certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has
grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near
the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper
thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat.
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo area.
The child could be seriously injured or
killed in a sudden stop or collision.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
WRS0256
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, refer to
“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this
section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating air bag could seriously
injure or kill a child. A rear-facing
child restraint must only be used in
the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants
or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you
may use either the LATCH anchors or the
seat belt to install the child restraint (not both
at the same time).
● If the combined weight of the child and child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
● Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LRS0429
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with the LATCH system
compatible child restraints. This system may also
be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to
use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child
and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the
combined weight of the child and child restraint is
greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) use the vehicles
seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0748
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LRS0395
LATCH lower anchor point locations
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
LRS0393
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located under the rear window
behind the rear bench seat.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child
Restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the child
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0801
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
WRS0802
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section.
WRS0256
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child
restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt
is fully retracted.
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint in the rear bench seats using the
LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child
Restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
LRS2398
Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
LRS2399
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for head
restraint/headrest adjustment information.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
2. Position the top tether strap over the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the wall behind the seatback behind
the child restraint.
4. Return the seatback to the locked position.
LRS0392
WRS0423
Rear bench seat
Rear bench seat
1.
Anchor point strap
1.
2.
Anchor points
2.
Top tether strap
Installing top tether strap
3.
Tether anchor point
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments.
Rear bench seat
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear bench outboarding seating
positions only).
Seatback
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT
PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH
SEAT
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation
of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child
Restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure
to reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section. Do not install
child restraints that require the use of a top
tether strap in seating positions that do not
have a top tether anchor.
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 8.
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0865
Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
should illuminate. If this
status light
light is not illuminated refer to ⬙Front passenger air bag and status light⬙ in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
● NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
facing child restraint in the front center
bench seat, follow these instructions
carefully.
● A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat.
WRS0256
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT BENCH
CENTER POSITION
WARNING
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Front air bags inflate with great force. A
rear-facing child restraint could be
struck by the front air bag in a crash and
could seriously injure or kill your child.
WRS0914
Foward-Facing — step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child
Restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of the
lower anchors if the combined weight of the child
and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If
the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the
vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Follow these steps to install a child restraint in the
front center bench seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seat back. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/Headrests” in this section. If the
head restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to install the head restraint
when the child restraint is removed. If the
seating position does not have an adjustable
head restraint and it is interfering with the
proper child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
WRS0915
Forward-Facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for seat belt routing.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0916
Forward-Facing — step 4
4. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt. Press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 5.
WRS0917
Forward-Facing — step 5
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
LRS0392
1.
Anchor point strap
2.
Anchor points
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
2. Position the top tether strap over the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the wall behind the seatback behind
the child restraint.
4. Return the seatback to the locked position.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
WRS0423
Rear bench seat
1.
Seatback
2.
Top tether strap
3.
Tether anchor point
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store
it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this
section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchorages.
The child restraint will not be properly
installed using the damaged anchorage,
and a child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
LRS2479
A.
Low back booster seat
B.
High back booster seat
LRS0453
LRS0464
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle
seatback must be at or above the center of
the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than
the center of the child’s ears, a high back
booster seat should be used.
● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
Booster seat installation on front
passenger seat and rear bench seat
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings
and Cautions in the “Child Safety”, “Child Restraints” and “Booster Seats” sections of this
manual before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
LRS0454
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster
seat
fit.
If
the
head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the
booster seat is removed. For additional
information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for head
restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” in this section.
LRS0865
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
may or may not illuminate,
status light
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information
concerning the following systems:
● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and right front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or rollover
collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both
curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash
protection provided by the seat belts and is not a
substitute for them. Seat belts should always be
correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional
information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
This system can help cushion the impact force to
the chest area of the driver and right front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side
air bag is designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
WRS0031
WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, refer to
“Front Passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1042
ARS1043
ARS1044
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain and rollover air bags
inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
ARS1045
WRS0431
WRS0256
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints”
in this section for details.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
● The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.
WARNING
LRS0396
Do not lean against doors or windows.
SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows.
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
LRS0421
WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0159
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification system control unit
7. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
8. Seat belt buckle switches
9. Seat belt with pretensioner
10. Satellite sensors
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and right
front passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
LRS2093
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The supplemental front air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in
certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack
of it) is not always an indication of proper front air
bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air Bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) and right front
passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and
seat belt usage for the driver. For the right front
passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of
an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt
tension. Based on information from the sensors,
only one front air bag may inflate in a crash,
depending on the crash severity and whether the
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the right front passenger air bag may be
automatically turned OFF under some conditions,
depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air
bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off). For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light”
in this section. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
beginning of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the driver and right front passenger. They
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating front air bag may cause
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual Supplement" beginning on page 2. **
Status light
The right front passenger air bag status
is located under the climate controls.
light
After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙
position, the front passenger air bag status light
on the instrument panel illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off or operates depending on the front passenger seat occupied
status. The light operates as follows:
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
light is OFF and the front passenger air bag
is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
LRS0865
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat,
seat belt and child restraints is necessary
for most effective protection. Failure to
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and
child restraints can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
illuminates to indicate
section: The
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this
is OFF to indicate
section: The light
that the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The right front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below
in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (weight sensor). It is in the bottom of the
right front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the
right front seat by weight. It works together with
seat belt sensors described in this section. For
example, if a child is in the right front passenger
seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed
to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance
with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its
weight and the child’s weight can be detected
and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant
classification sensor operation can vary depending on the right front passenger seat belt sensors.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual Supplement" beginning on page 2. **
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
System determines whether the front passenger
air bag should be automatically turned OFF, as
required by the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF; however, if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the
most effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child
restraints” in this section for proper use and installation.
If the right front passenger seat is not occupied
the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in
a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the right front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual Supplement" beginning on page 2. **
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, will
blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bags inflate.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor).
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in
certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for
example, during severe off-roading) may cause
the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
LRS2094
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. All of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity impact. They
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bag and
curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is
over.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON or START position.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short
time.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
Seat belts with pretensioners (front
outboard seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner
system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when
the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of
collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
is
The supplemental air bag warning light
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. For additional information, refer to
⬙Supplemental air bag warning light” in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
WRS0885
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain supplemental air bags and pretensioners are designed
to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag
warning light remains illuminated after inflation
has occurred. Repair and replacement of these
supplemental air bag systems should be done
only by a NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the
LOCK position when working under the hood or
inside the vehicle.
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner system disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and
pretensioner cannot be repaired.
1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-7
Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Vehicle Information Display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-20
How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-21
Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-35
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-41
Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
12v Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
120v outlet (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Overhead console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Lockable bedside storage compartment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Rear power window switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-57
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Power moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . 2-61
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Operating the HomeLink® universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-65
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
LIC2437
2-2 Instruments and controls
Vents (P. 4-15)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-32)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-27)
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-36)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-50, P. 2-37)
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)
Shift lever (column) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-14)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-30)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-4)
Climate controls (P. 4-15, P. 4-24)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
Glove box (P. 2-48)
Storage tray (P. 2-46)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-59)
METERS AND GAUGES
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-38)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (P. 2-39)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-42)
Electronic locking rear differential (ELock) system switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-39)
Shift lever (console) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-14)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
Power outlet (P. 2-42)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-29)
Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)
Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-38)/Rear sonar system off switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)/Pedal position adjustment switch (if so equipped)
(P. 3-14)/Rear power window switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-57)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
WIC1243
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Warning/indicator lights
Tachometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Voltmeter (if so equipped)
Fuel gauge
Speedometer
7.
8.
9.
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Vehicle
Information Display
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so
equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-3
WIC1244
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
1. Speedometer
2. Odometer/twin trip display
3. Change/reset button
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
2-4 Instruments and controls
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle is driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
WIC1245
Changing the display:
Pushing the change/reset button changes the
display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Odometer only
Elapsed time, driving distance and average
speed information is also available for vehicles
with a navigation system. For additional information, refer to “Control panel buttons-color screen
with navigation system” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section of this manual.
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change/reset button for more than
1 second resets the currently displayed trip
odometer to zero.
WIC1246
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine
1 .
into the red zone 䊊
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
LIC1135
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1 when the gauge needle points
normal range 䊊
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
Instruments and controls 2-5
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
The
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle
may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for
immediate action required.
CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
LIC1199
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty).
2-6 Instruments and controls
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)
● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.
LIC1198
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if
so equipped)
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. The
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when
the engine is running.
LIC1136
VOLTMETER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the
generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
1 while the engine is
range (11 - 15 volts) 䊊
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-7
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low automatic transmission fluid level.
Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.
(For additional information, refer to “5speed automatic transmission fluid” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.)
WIC1247
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
TEMPERATURE GAUGE (if so
equipped)
This gauge indicates the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid. The automatic transmission fluid temperature is in the normal range
1 when the gauge needle points within the zone
䊊
shown in the illustration.
● If the gauge indicates automatic transmission fluid temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. Have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued
operation of the vehicle may seriously
damage the transmission.
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the heading direction of the vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
or
button as described in the
the
charts below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Type A (if so equipped)
Push and hold
the
button for about:
1 second
8 seconds
11 seconds
13 seconds
Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode
Type B (if so equipped)
Push and hold
the
button for about:
1 second
8 seconds
10 seconds
Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode
For additional information about the automatic
anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
2-8 Instruments and controls
WIC0904
Type A (if so equipped)
COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the
or
button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position to toggle the compass direction display
1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction
䊊
that the vehicle is heading.
LIC1487
Type B (if so equipped)
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
Instruments and controls 2-9
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
button for about
1. Press and hold the
button for about
11 seconds or the
8 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
or the
button repeat3. Press the
edly to toggle through the zone numbers
until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction
WIC0355
2-10 Instruments and controls
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the
for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-11
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Low tire pressure warning light
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Automatic transmission check warning light
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Automatic transmission park warning light
model)
(
Master warning light
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
or
Seat belt warning light and chime
Slip indicator light
Charge warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light (if so equipped)
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system on indicator light (if so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
4WD warning light (
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)
or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Brake warning light
model)
Low fuel warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
,
or
,
,
,
2-12 Instruments and controls
,
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
or
,
,
,
,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates and
then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For
additional information, refer to “Brake system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Automatic Transmission check
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.
If the light comes on at any other time, it may
indicate the automatic transmission system is not
functioning properly. Have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
Automatic transmission park
model)
warning light (
WARNING
This light indicates that the automatic transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any drive position
while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
transmission will disengage and the drive wheels
will not lock.
or
Brake warning light
● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that
the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer
case is in neutral.
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
● When parking, always make sure that
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates
and the parking brake is set. Failure to
engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H
or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious
personal injury or property damage.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H
or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP
warning light when the shift lever to the
P position and the ATP warning light is
ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switch
into the 4LO position, move the shift
lever to the N position once, shift the
shift lever into P again and make sure
the ATP warning light is OFF.)
Parking brake indicator
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-13
WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort and pedal travel.
● If the brake fluid
MINIMUM or MIN
fluid reservoir, do
brake system has
NISSAN dealer.
level is below the
mark on the brake
not drive until the
been checked at a
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the ABS warning light illuminates, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the brake system checked, and if
necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer
promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt
2-14 Instruments and controls
braking. For additional information, refer to “Antilock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this
section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so
will bypass the variable control system
and the vehicle battery may not charge
completely. For additional information,
refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing
Engine oil pressure low/
Engine coolant temperature
high warning light (if so
equipped)
This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high
engine coolant temperature.
If the light flickers or comes on during normal
driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the
engine and allow it to cool. If the light remains on
after checking the oil and coolant, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or
other authorized repair shop.
This light is not designed to indicate a low
oil or low coolant level. Check the oil level with
the dipstick and check the coolant level on the
reservoir. For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section and “Engine oil” and “Checking
engine coolant level” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
CAUTION
● Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
● If the gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature over the normal range,
stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For
additional information, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section for immediate action required.
4WD warning light (
model)
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the
engine is started.
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,
the warning light will either remain illuminated or
blink. For additional information, refer to “4WD
warning light” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
CAUTION
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
during operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
warning light turns on when you are
driving on dry hard surface roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,
move the shift lever to the N position
with the brake pedal depressed, and
shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
reaches E (Empty).
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.If you select the tire pressure information in the display (if so equipped), the LOW
PRESSURE warning message will be displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will
also be displayed.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
Instruments and controls 2-15
justed. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears
each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position as long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
2-16 Instruments and controls
For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section in this
manual.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electrical medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch in the ON position, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the
tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the
tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear.
● No key warning
● Low fuel warning
● Door open warning
● Loose fuel cap warning
● Check tire pressure warning
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in
the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat
belts with pretensioner system may not function
properly. For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental restraint system (SRS)” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
● Low windshield-washer fluid warning
● Parking brake release warning
Instruments and controls 2-17
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
Electronic locking rear
differential (E-Lock) system on
indicator light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the electronic locking
rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully
engaged.
in this section and “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are ON. For additional information, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler
cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is
installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle
has at least 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light”
in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
The indicator light flashes when the system is first
turned on. When the system fully engages, the
light remains on. If the switch is on and the
indicator light continues to flash, the system is
not engaged.
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch”
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
light should
After a few driving trips, the
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. For additional information,
refer
to
“Readiness
for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
● MIL on steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning appears in the vehicle information
display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to
light should turn
drive the vehicle. The
light
off after a few driving trips. If the
does not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.
Security indicator light (if so
equipped)
● MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emission
control system. To reduce or avoid emission
control system damage:
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
For additional information, refer to “Security systems” in this section.
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system or the Traction Control
System (TCS) is operating, thus alerting that the
vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road
surface may be slippery.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) off indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the VDC off
switch is pushed to OFF, the transfer case is in
model), or when the
the 4LO position (
VDC system is not functioning properly. This
indicates the VDC system is not operating.
Push the VDC off switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The VDC light also comes on when you place the
ignition switch in the ON position. The light will
turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
operational. If the light stays on or comes on
indicator light while you are
along with the
driving, have the VDC system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-19
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)
While the VDC system is operating, you might
feel slight vibration or hear the system working
when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this
is normal.
The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC
light will illuminate when the electronic locking
rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so
equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is
engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or the
switch is turned off, the VDC system will be
enabled and the VDC light will turn off.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
2-20 Instruments and controls
WIC1248
1 is located to
The vehicle information display 䊊
the left of the speedometer. It displays such items
as:
● Automatic transmission position indicator
● Cruise control system information (if so
equipped)
● Some indicators and warnings
● Alerts
2 to highlight the deRotate the INFO button 䊊
sired menu option within the selected mode.
1 to enter the highPress the INFO button 䊊
lighted menu.
The icons at the bottom of the display screen
show the options available:
ENTER — Press the INFO button to select
a highlighted option.
NEXT — Rotate the INFO button to highlight an option.
WIC1249
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Press the vehicle information display INFO but1 located on the instrument panel to toggle
ton 䊊
through the following modes:
LIC1093
Fuel economy mode (if so equipped)
The fuel economy mode can be selected to display the instant fuel economy.
● Fuel economy (if so equipped)
● Driving averages
● Current trip information
● Range
● Outside temperature (if so equipped)
● Settings
Instruments and controls 2-21
LIC1097
WIC1266
LIC2598
Average driving information mode
Current trip information mode
Range mode
The average driving information mode can be
selected to display the average miles per gallon
and miles per hour since the last reset.
The current trip information mode can be selected to show the time and distance driven since
the last reset.
The range mode can be selected to give you an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.
2-22 Instruments and controls
LIC1096
Exterior temperature mode (if so
equipped)
The exterior temperature mode can be selected
to provide you with the temperature outside of
your vehicle.
LIC2594
LIC2595
Settings mode
Alert mode
The settings mode allows you to set reminders or
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals, language, and units.
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying
you of time to rest or icy conditions.
In the settings mode screen, rotate the INFO
button to move to:
● Alert
● Maintenance
The time to rest alert is a timer that can be set to
remind the driver when the selected amount of
time has passed.
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving conditions may exist.
● Display
and press the INFO button to select the menu.
Instruments and controls 2-23
WIC1164
WIC1165
LIC1098
Maintenance mode
Display mode
Warning mode
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the
following:
Rotate the INFO button to highlight the desired
mode, then press the INFO button to select.
The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.
● engine oil
● oil filter
● tires
● other
Set a desired interval by rotating the INFO button
to highlight the maintenance field, then press the
INFO button to select. The reset mode will open
up and allow you to enter the desired distance.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Language: English or French
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.
Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For additional information
about potential warnings, refer to “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in this
section.
LIC2603
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators
4. Parking brake warning
5. Cruise main switch indicator (if so equipped)
8. 4WD shift indicator (
9. Automatic transmission position indicator
1. Door open warning
6. Cruise set switch indicator (if so equipped)
10. Loose fuel cap warning
2. Low fuel warning (if so equipped)
7. Transfer 4LO position indicator (
model)
11. Check tire pressure warning
3. Low windshield-washer fluid warning
model)
Instruments and controls 2-25
Door open warning
This warning illuminates when a door has been
opened and the engine is running.
Low fuel warning
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Parking brake warning
This warning illuminates when the parking brake
is set and the vehicle is driven.
Cruise main switch indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off
when the main switch is pushed again. When the
2-26 Instruments and controls
cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the
cruise control system is operational.
Cruise set switch indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system. If the
indicator blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Transfer 4LO position indicator (
model)
This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift
switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition
switch placed in the ON position.
If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position
and the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, drive
slowly forward and the indicator will turn on.
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position, then depress and turn the 4WD shift
switch to 4LO or 4H.
The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the
switch while driving.
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch
between 4H and 4LO unless you have first
stopped the vehicle and moved the shift lever to
N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO position
indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift
switch to 4LO.
The indicator may blink while shifting from
one drive mode to the other.
4WD shift indicator (
model)
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator will illuminate the position selected by the
4WD shift switch.
The 4WD shift indicator may blink while
shifting from one drive mode to the other.
Automatic transmission position indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator shows the shift lever position. For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Loose fuel cap warning
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle is refueled. For additional information, refer to “Fuelfiller cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
Check tire pressure warning
The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
LIC0644
Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so
equipped)
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with the key, power door lock
switch (if the door is opened, locked and
then closed), or with the key fob.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Key fob operation:
● Push the
button on the key fob.
All doors lock. The hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once to indicate
all doors are locked.
button is pushed with
● When the
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” (vehicles without navigation system) in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section of this manual.
indicator light comes
4. Confirm that the
light stays on for about
on. The
30 seconds. The vehicle security system is
now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the
vehicle security system automatically shifts
light begins
into the armed phase. The
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the door is
unlocked by the key or the key fob, or the
ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON, the
system will not arm.
2-28 Instruments and controls
● If the key is turned slowly when locking
the door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond
the vertical position toward the unlock
position to remove the key, the system
may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for a period of time, unlock the
door once and lock it again.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will arm
with all doors closed and locked with the
ignition switch in the OFF position.
● The lockable bedside storage compartment (if so equipped) is not protected
by the vehicle security system.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
button
with the key or by pressing the
on the key fob.
The alarm is activated by:
● Opening a door without using the key or key
fob (even if the door is unlocked by using the
inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
button
door with the key or by pressing the
on the key fob.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
For Canada:
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
Instruments and controls 2-29
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2
䊊
3
䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation
4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up 䊊
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
WARNING
LIC0965
LIC2858
Type A (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
CAUTION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
● Do not operate the washer of the reservoir is empty.
1
䊊
2-30 Instruments and controls
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster). Also, the inter䊊
mittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
● Do not fill the windshield-washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.
LIC0488
Type A (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
LIC1173
Type B (if so equipped)
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-31
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
NOTE:
If the rear power window (if so equipped) is
lowered while the defroster switch is on,
the rear window defroster will automatically shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if
so equipped) will remain on. The rear window defroster will automatically turn on
when the rear power window is fully closed
if the switch is on.
CAUTION
LIC1158
Type C (if so equipped)
2-32 Instruments and controls
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
SIC2745
Type A (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
WIC1250
SIC3019
Type B (if so equipped)
Type C (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊
2
䊊
When turning the switch to the
position, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
When turning the switch to the
position, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
Instruments and controls 2-33
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 .
tion 䊊
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the headlights are
on, then the timer is reset.
WIC1251
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.
2-34 Instruments and controls
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
, or
position.
the OFF,
LIC0836
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
1 located on the top
the autolight sensor 䊊
side of the instrument panel. The autolight
sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.
After the headlights automatically turn off with the
or
position,
headlight switch in the
the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight
switch is moved to the OFF position and then
or
position.
turned to the
CAUTION
WIC1252
Headlight beam select
1
䊊
䊊
3
䊊
2
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
light illuminates.
and the
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position
position. Turn the headlight switch
or in the
to the
position for full illumination when
driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Lane change signal
2
䊊
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever
until the lane change is completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not
latch, and release the lever. The turn signal
will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane
change based on road and traffic conditions.
WIC1506
WIC1253
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
The instrument brightness control operates when
the
headlight
control
switch
is
in
,
or AUTO position (with autothe
lights activated).
1
䊊
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights when driving at night.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
HORN
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
WIC1254
LIC2051
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the
steering wheel.
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the
position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
position.
the
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
Instruments and controls 2-37
CARGO LAMP SWITCH (if so
equipped)
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
LIC0616
To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch down
to the ON position. The tailgate lights (if so
equipped) will also illuminate when the cargo
lamp switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF
position when you leave the vehicle for
extended periods of time, otherwise the
battery will go dead.
2-38 Instruments and controls
WIC1441
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired, depending on the temperature. The
indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC1548
LIC0729
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.
The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock)
system can help provide added traction if the
vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
indicator will come on.
switch. The
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
To activate the E-Lock system:
● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position
(4-wheel drive vehicles),
● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at
4 MPH (7 km/h) or less, and
● the E-Lock system switch must be turned
ON.
Instruments and controls 2-39
POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)
When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indicator light will flash until the system engages.
However, if all operation conditions listed above
are not met or the system becomes disengaged,
the indicator light will continue to flash.
The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual for
further explanation and system limitations.
WARNING
● Never leave the E-Lock system ON when
driving on paved or hard-surfaced
roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
the rear wheels slipping and result in an
accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system OFF.
2-40 Instruments and controls
● Use the E-Lock system only when freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position
before using the E-Lock system. Never
use the E-Lock system on a slippery
road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when
driving in these road conditions may
cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an
accident and serious personal injury.
CAUTION
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended
use.
● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)
when the system is engaged. Doing so
could result in possible damage to the
driveline.
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while
the tires are spinning. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
LIC2075
To use the outlets for devices that require 120v
power, place the ignition in the ON position and
push the power inverter switch.
The 400W or 150W on the switch will illuminate
according to the mode selected. Only the 150W
is available when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position or while the vehicle is being
driven. For additional information, refer to “120v
outlets” in this section of the manual regarding
using devices that require the power inverter
switch activated.
REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(if so equipped)
The rear sonar system can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
Push the switch again to enable the system. The
indicator light will go off.
CAUTION
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Do not attempt to use this while driving.
The system will automatically reset the next time
the ignition switch is turned on.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory, doing so
could significantly drain the battery of
your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Rear sonar
system” in the “Starting and driving” section.
LIC0471
WARNING
The rear sonar system is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back up
slowly.
The rear sonar system is active when the ignition
switch is placed to the ON position and the shift
lever is in R (Reverse).
When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft
(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is
emitted.
Instruments and controls 2-41
TOW MODE SWITCH
POWER OUTLETS
For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section in this manual.
LIC0594
Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy
trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle
in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light
trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the
transmission/engine driving characteristics may
feel unusual.
Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.
The indicator light on the tow mode switch illuminates when tow mode is selected. Press the tow
mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.
Tow mode is automatically canceled when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
2-42 Instruments and controls
12V OUTLETS
WIC1404
Front row
WIC0643
2nd row (if so equipped)
LIC0618
Inside center armrest (if so equipped)
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones.
The power outlets located on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel is powered only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
The power outlets located on the passenger’s
side of the instrument panel, and in the 2nd row
are powered only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-43
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do
not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
2-44 Instruments and controls
LIC0617
In truck box (if so equipped)
120V OUTLET (if so equipped)
LIC2433
Center console (if so equipped)
Before Drive (idling)
(Park)
Options
When shifting out of
Park
When shifting back to
(idling) (Park)
Switch Reset
What is plugged IN
Indicator
Inverter
Status
Indicator
Inverter
Status
Indicator
Inverter
Status
Indicator
Inverter
Status
Nothing plugged but switch is
on
150 and
400
ON
150
ON
150 and
400
ON
NOT
NECESSARY
NOT
NECESSARY
Device<150W
150 and
400
ON
150
ON
150 and
400
ON
NOT
NECESSARY
NOT
NECESSARY
150W>device<400W
150 and
400
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
150 and
400
ON
Device>400W
150 and
400
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF**
OFF**
** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicators
and inverter would remain OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches it’s peak saturation
point (temp and power level). it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators.
Instruments and controls 2-45
STORAGE
Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with
accessories that exceed 120 volt. Do not use
double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
CAUTION
● Operation of the 120 volt system with
the ignition in the ON position and the
engine not running (idle) will drain the
battery charge. This could lead to a
dead battery or no start condition.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Do not use double adaptors or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
2-46 Instruments and controls
LIC0565
Side tray
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE
TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.
The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning.
LIC0566
Center tray
LIC1369
CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)
Console box storage trays (if so
equipped)
LIC1371
Console box lock
1 or unlock 䊊
2 the
Use the master key to lock 䊊
console box.
Instruments and controls 2-47
LIC0621
LIC0578
CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so
equipped)
GLOVE BOX
To access the center armrest storage area, lower
the center armrest and lift the lid.
Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box
lock (if so equipped). The valet key cannot be
used.
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
2-48 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
LIC0567
SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so
equipped)
LIC0589
MAP POCKETS
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
WARNING
● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
Instruments and controls 2-49
LIC0568
LIC0575
SEATBACK POCKET (if so equipped)
The seatback pocket is located on the back of the
driver’s seat. The pocket can be used to store
maps.
Small bin (if so equipped)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (if so
equipped)
LIC0569
Medium bin (if so equipped)
Storage bins
WARNING
Keep storage bins closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
Push the button to open a storage bin.
Push the lid up to close.
2-50 Instruments and controls
LIC1372
Front — Type A (if so equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
LIC0620
Front — Type B (if so equipped)
LIC1373
Adjustable (if so equipped)
Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so
that the cup is held securely.
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
Instruments and controls 2-51
LIC0622
Armrest (if so equipped)
2-52 Instruments and controls
LIC0554
2nd row (rear of front console)
(if so equipped)
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.
LIC0556
2nd row bench (if so equipped)
LIC0558
Bottle holder — Type A (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
LIC0624
Bottle holder — Type B (if so equipped)
LIC0626
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic
grocery bags to hang side by side.
To access the grocery hooks, fold up the rear
bench seat. For additional information, refer to
“Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
18 lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.
Instruments and controls 2-53
WINDOWS
CAUTION
● Do not store a total load of more than
22 lbs (10 kg) inside the storage
compartment.
● Do not use the storage compartment or
storage compartment lid as a step. Doing so may damage them.
LIC0625
LOCKABLE BEDSIDE STORAGE
COMPARTMENT (if so equipped)
To access the bedside storage compartment,
hold the key hole cover open and insert the
master key. Turn the key clockwise to unlock the
lid.
The tray inside the bedside storage compartment
is adjustable.
The bedside storage compartment will automatically lock when the lid is closed. You do not need
to use the key.
2-54 Instruments and controls
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of time, the
power to the windows is canceled.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.
WIC0845
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger side automatic switch
Right rear passenger window switch
Left rear passenger window switch
Driver side automatic switch
LIC0580
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
1 .
the window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
To close the window, pull the switch up 䊊
Instruments and controls 2-55
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
LIC0581
LIC0410
Rear power window switch
Automatic operation
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
2-56 Instruments and controls
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
NOTE:
If the rear power window (if so equipped) is
lowered while the defroster switch is on,
the rear window defroster will automatically shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if
so equipped) will remain on. The rear window defroster will automatically turn on
when the rear power window is fully closed
if the switch is on.
LIC0627
LIC1553
REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so
equipped)
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(if so equipped)
1 , then slide
Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊
2 .
the window open 䊊
To open the rear power window, push in and hold
the switch.
To close the rear power window, pull out and hold
the switch.
To stop the opening or closing function at any
time, simply release the switch.
Instruments and controls 2-57
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
5 while the moonroof is
switch in any direction 䊊
sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired
position.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to1 .
ward the up position 䊊
To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switch
2 .
toward the down position 䊊
Restarting the moonroof sliding switch
WIC0812
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The power
moonroof is operational for a period of time, even
if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF
position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time,
the power to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to3 .
ward the open position 䊊
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
4 .
toward the close position 䊊
2-58 Instruments and controls
The sliding switch will become inoperable after
the battery terminal is disconnected, the electrical supply interrupted and/or some abnormality
detected. Use the following reset procedure to
return moonroof operation to normal.
1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting
switch repeatedly toward the down position
2 to fully close the lid.
䊊
2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more
than 2 seconds toward the down position
2 to reestablish the lid’s home position.
䊊
The moonroof should now operate normally.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for a period of time
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
INTERIOR LIGHT
When tilting down
Sunshade
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
LIC0585
Type A (if so equipped)
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
1 , the
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time
unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Instruments and controls 2-59
The lights will turn off while the timer is activated
when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the key fob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
3 , the
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) and
cargo light come on when any front or rear passenger door is opened.
LIC0630
Type B (if so equipped)
When the switch is in the DOOR or normal
2 , the interior lights, puddle
operation position 䊊
lights (if so equipped) and cargo light will stay on
for a period of time when:
● The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key
or the power door lock switch while all doors
are closed and the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
2-60 Instruments and controls
The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
LIC0587
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
NOTE:
The door step lights (if so equipped) illuminate when the driver and passenger doors
are open regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
1 will turn on whenever the
The console light 䊊
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control.
PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most Radio Frequency devices
such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security
systems.
LIC0623
LIC0586
The personal lights on the overhead console can
be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light,
press the button. Press the button again to turn
off the light.
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
turn them off, press the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-61
WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver.
2-62 Instruments and controls
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the
HomeLink®
surface,
keeping
the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
LIC2365
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button and
hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re1
lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers” in this section.
Do not stand on your vehicle to perform
the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage door
opener motor in the garage, locate the
“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer but it
is usually located near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there
is difficulty locating the button, reference the
garage door opener’s manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button.
LIC2366
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
● If
the
indicator
light
䊊 is
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
1
1 blinks rapidly for
● If the indicator light 䊊
2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.
A second person may make the following
steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and
hold the trained HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to three
times to complete the training process.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons,
refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND
GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during training. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
training a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Training” procedures, replace
“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the
following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
process to prevent possible damage to the
garage door opener components.
1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button and the
hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may auto-
Instruments and controls 2-63
matically stop transmitting. Continue to
press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds
until the frequency signal has been learned.
The HomeLink® indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds
upon successful training. DO NOT release
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”
step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it
back in when programming is completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is
programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and
release
the
appropriate
programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The
amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time.
2-64 Instruments and controls
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
The following procedure clears the programmed
information from both buttons. Individual buttons
cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons
can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer to “Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button” in this section.
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
● position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
● press and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLink® is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not
hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning
with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
For Canada:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515
(except Mexico).
FCC Notice:
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button
has now been reprogrammed. The new device
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®
button that was just programmed. This procedure
will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
buttons.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For USA:
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Instruments and controls 2-65
MEMO
2-66 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Wide Open doors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-7
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
WPD0128
1.
2.
3.
4.
Two master keys (black) with transponder chip (if so equipped) and chrome
NISSAN brand symbol on one side
Valet key (black) with transponder chip
(if so equipped)
Key number plate
Transponder chip (if so equipped)
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The master key can be used for all the locks.
The valet key cannot be used for the console box
lock, the bedside storage compartment lock, or
the glove box lock (if so equipped).
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the valet key only.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. As many as four NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect system function.
DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
LOCKING WITH KEY
WPD0311
LPD0240
Driver’s side
Driver’s side
Manual
Power
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
vehicle 䊊
2 .
䊊
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral 䊊
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
4 within 45 seconds
toward the rear again 䊊
unlocks all doors.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Opening and closing windows
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time.
● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
LPD0241
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WPD0381
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position 䊊
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position 䊊
LPD0278
LPD0266
LPD0267
WIDE OPEN DOORS (if so equipped)
1
2. From the outside, pull the door handle 䊊
toward you.
From the inside, pull the inside door handle toward you. The door will unlock automatically.
CAUTION
Do not open the Wide Open door to the
full open position while the fuel-filler door
is open; only open it as far as the first
detent. Opening the door to the full open
position may damage the fuel-filler door
and Wide Open door.
The Wide Open doors open nearly 180° to allow
access to the rear of the cab.
1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position. To
unlock the door manually, use the inside lock
knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side).
LPD0265
3. Open the door to the desired position.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
● All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) position.
The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
position (UNLOCK) for more than
the
5 seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
LPD0242
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
(if so equipped)
● The remote keyless entry key fob transmits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry key fob while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
As many as five key fobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional key fobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
● the battery is discharged
● the distance between the vehicle and the
key fob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the key fob from outside the vehicle.
● Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
● Do not drop the key fob.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
The key fob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.
● Do not change or modify the key fob.
● Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.
● Wetting may damage the key fob. If the
key fob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
button is pressed with
● When the
all doors locked, the hazard warning lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once as a
reminder that the doors are already
locked.
● Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
● If a door is open and you press
button, the doors will lock
the
but the horn will not beep and the hazard
lights will not flash.
● Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that key
fob. This will prevent the key fob from
unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, please contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional
information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep
feature” in this section.
LPD0209
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood and all doors.
button on the key fob. All
4. Press the
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once to
indicate all doors are locked.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
button on the key fob again
Press the
within 5 seconds.
● All doors unlock.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by inserting the key into the ignition switch
and placing it in the ON or START position,
locking the doors with the key fob or pushing the
interior light switch to the OFF position.
Auto relock
LPD0210
Unlocking doors
Press the
button on the key fob once.
When the
button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically within
1 minute unless one of the following operations is
performed:
● Only the driver’s door unlocks.
● Any door is opened.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition
switch in any position except the ON position.
● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
● The interior lights and puddle lights (if so
equipped) turn on and the light timer activates for a period of time when the interior
light switch is in the DOOR position with the
ignition switch in any position except the ON
position.
Linking the key fob to automatic drive
positioner memory (if so equipped)
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the key fob can be linked to a memory
setting.
LPD0211
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
key fob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a
period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for a period of time, or
● any button is pressed on the key fob.
For additional information, refer to “Automatic
drive positioner” in this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Using the interior lights
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
Press the
button on the key fob once to
turn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if so
equipped).
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature is deactivated.
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds once
more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature reactivated.
LPD0262
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the key fob.
NOTE:
If you change the horn beep and light flash
feature with the key fob, the display screen
(if so equipped) will not show the current
mode and cannot be used to change the
mode. Use the key fob to return to the
previous mode and re-enable the display
screen control.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
HOOD
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LPD0244
1
䊊
䊊
2
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly.
Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
LPD0263
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to come on.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on up to E-85 fuel.
Fuel system or other damage can occur
if up to E-85 fuel is used in vehicles that
are not designed to run on E-85 fuel. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
Recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
● Do not fill a portable fuel container on a
truck bed liner, rubber truck bed mat, or
other insulating material. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle
or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. It may take a few driving trips
for the message to be displayed. Failure
to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning apMalfunction
pears may cause the
Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
light illuminates because
If the
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
light
to drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving trips.
light does not turn off after a
If the
few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)”
and “Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section in this manual.
3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset butA on the instrument panel located beton 䊊
hind the steering wheel for about 1 second
to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
B after tightening the fuel-filler cap.
䊊
LPD0325
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
1
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook 䊊
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
LRS2005
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
odometer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened
correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It
may take a few driving trips for the message to be
displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the
following:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as previously described as soon as possible.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
STEERING WHEEL
PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal.
LPD0254
TILT OPERATION
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
Pull the lock lever toward the driver and hold it to
adjust the steering wheel up or down to the
desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LPD0255
The accelerator and brake pedals can be adjusted for driving comfort.
Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
brake and accelerator pedal position away from
1 or toward the driver 䊊
2 .
the driver 䊊
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be adjusted separately.
WARNING
Do not adjust the pedal position while
driving. You can lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
SUN VISORS
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as
needed.
CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
WPD0141
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
WPD0344
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
WPD0126
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 to reduce glare from
Use the night position 䊊
the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position 䊊
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
䊊
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
LPD0446
Type A (if so equipped)
Type A (if so equipped)
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posibutton as described:
tion, press the
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button. The indicator light will turn
the
off.
● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
button again. The indicator light
the
will turn on.
The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
For additional information about the compass
2 (if so equipped), refer
and compass features 䊊
to “Compass display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
WPD0331
Type B (if so equipped)
Type B (if so equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
button as described:
the
● To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
button. The indicator light
press the
will turn off.
● To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,
button again. The indicator
press the
light will turn on.
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
WPD0170
LPD0237
Electric control type (if so equipped)
Manual control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction
for a better rear view.
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position.
1 to select the right or left
Move the small switch 䊊
2 to adjust each
mirror. Move the large switch 䊊
mirror to the desired position.
LPD0279
Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)
WARNING
Objects viewed in the convex portion of
the trailer tow mirror are closer than they
appear. Be careful when changing lanes or
turning. Using only the convex mirror
could cause an accident. Use the other
mirrors or glance over your shoulder to
properly judge distances to other objects.
Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust
the top portion of the trailer tow mirror.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be
moved manually in any direction for a better rear
view.
LPD0259
LPD0268
Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to
the desired position for better visibility while towing a trailer.
WARNING
Type A (if so equipped)
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Do not extend or retract mirrors while driving. You may lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Driving in tight spaces with mirrors extended may cause damage to the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or
bumped, the mirror body can become loose at
the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by pushing the bottom
of the switch until completely closed, then push
the top of the switch until the mirrors are in the
open position.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
LPD0269
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2316
Power folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not manually fold the power folding
mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can
damage the mirrors.
Push the switch to open or close the mirrors.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
TRUCK BOX
For additional information on proper truck box
loading, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
LPD0270
TAILGATE
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Opening the tailgate
Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the
tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate
open.
When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches
are securely locked.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate
down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed
Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the
extended position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove box and
connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to
avoid contamination which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
7. Remove the tailgate. For additional information, refer to “Removing the tailgate” in this
section.
LPD2097
Disconnecting the rear camera (if so
equipped)
Before removing the tailgate disconnect the rear
camera by performing the following:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera
1 located on the rear
connector bracket 䊊
sill.
2 from the
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the
direction shown, while pulling the bracket
apart.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness 䊊
by pressing inward on the locking tab, in the
direction shown, while pulling the connectors apart. Hold the connector firmly to prevent the connector in the chassis harness
from falling into the sill.
4. Take the chassis plug and bracket from the
glove box and connect them to the chassis
wiring harness to avoid contamination to the
terminals which will lead to malfunction of
the rear camera.
5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.
3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.
4. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.
5. Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge.
Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and
insert into the left side hinge.
3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree
angle and attach the tailgate support cables.
LPD0271
Removing the tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to “Disconnecting the rear
camera” in this section.
4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be sure the
tailgate harness is not hanging below the
tailgate and keep the tailgate open. For additional information, refer to “Connecting the
rear camera” in this section before closing
the tailgate.
5. For vehicles without rear camera: Close the
tailgate securely.
2. Release the tailgate support cables.
CAUTION
● The tailgate is heavy. Two people
should remove or install it. Be careful
not to drop it during removal.
● After releasing the support cables, do
not let the tailgate rest on the bumper.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
LPD2097
Connecting the rear camera (if so
equipped)
Before closing the tailgate reconnect the rear
camera by performing the following:
1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the truck,
keep the tailgate open and check that the
tailgate harness is not hanging below the
tailgate.
2 from the
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the
direction shown, while pulling the bracket
apart.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. Disconnect the chassis plug and bracket
3 . Keep
from the chassis wiring harness 䊊
the connector and bracket in a safe place
such as the glove box.
4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug
in a safe place such as the glove box.
5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to the
chassis wiring harness.
6. Securely fix the rear camera connector
1 to the rear sill.
bracket 䊊
7. Close the tailgate securely.
LPD0272
Locking the tailgate
To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward the
1 . To lock, turn the
passenger side of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
key toward the driver side 䊊
Both the master key and the valet key can be
used to lock and unlock the tailgate.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
The automatic drive positioner system has two
features:
● Memory storage function
● Entry/exit function
LTI0102
TIE DOWN HOOKS
For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed
at each corner of the truck box. These may be
used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck
box.
● The weight of the cargo load must be evenly
distributed over both the front and the rear
axles.
● All cargo should be securely fastened with
ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or
sliding within the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual and “Pedal
position adjustment” and “Outside mirrors”
in this section.
During this step, do not place the ignition
switch in any position other than ON.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2).
LPD0260
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.
Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the
desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected
memory (1 or 2).
If a new memory is stored in the same memory
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
Linking a key fob to a stored memory
position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure.
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory position.
2. While the indicator light for the memory
switch being set is illuminated for 5 secbutton on the key fob.
onds, press the
The indicator light will blink. After the indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked to that
memory setting.
With the key removed from the ignition switch,
button on the key fob. The drivpress the
er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is saved to the
memory switch, the key fob automatically
re-links.
Confirming memory storage
● Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and push the SET switch. If the main memory
has not been stored, the indicator light will
come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.
When the memory has stored the position,
the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the memory storage function will
be canceled and must be restarted before a
stored memory position can be set again.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the memory storage function. You
can also restart the memory storage function
using the following procedure.
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
two times with the ignition switch in the
LOCK position.
Once the memory storage function has been
restarted, you can store a memory position.
For additional information, refer to “Memory
storage function” in this section.
Selecting the memorized position
Set the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then:
The driver’s seat will slide backward:
● When the key is removed from the ignition
switch and the driver’s door is opened.
● When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous position:
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
● When the key is inserted into the ignition
switch and the driver’s door is closed.
● When the driver’s door is closed with the
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.
● Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and push the memory switch (1 or 2).
● When the ignition switch is turned from
ACC to ON while the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
will automatically move when the shift lever is
placed in the P (Park) position. This allows the
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more
easily.
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
two times with the ignition switch in the
LOCK position.
● When the ignition switch is turned from
ACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open.
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or
The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,
and outside mirrors will move to the memorized
position with the indicator light blinking, and then
the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled. See your NISSAN dealer.
Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
the entry/exit function using the following procedure.
SYSTEM OPERATION
● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH
(7 km/h).
● When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat is turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
● When the seat has already been moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)
to any other position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.
The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. See your NISSAN
dealer.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
iPod®* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
NissanConnectSM with Mobile Apps
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Registering with NissanConnectSM with
Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and
contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.
LHA3138
1. MAP button*
5.
2. Display screen
6. BACK button
(brightness control) button
3.
button**
7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob
4.
button
8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
* For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding
the Navigation system control buttons.
** For additional information, refer to the
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
navigation system” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System without navigation system” regarding Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN
CAUTION
● The glass display screen may break if it
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.
WARNING
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
Reference symbols:
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be grayed out or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
LHA2916
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123/ABC
Space
Delete
OK
Result
1 on the screen. Press the BACK button to return to
Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key 䊊
the previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time,
or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time, or
touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page.
Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Changes the available character set to numbers.
Inserts a space.
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters.
Completes the character input.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the previous
screen.
LHA2773
HOW TO USE THE
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual regarding
the “SiriusXM Travel Link” and “SiriusXM Traffic”
features.
For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM with Mobile Apps” regarding the “My
Apps” key in this section.
LHA2916
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” regarding the “Voice
Commands” key in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Menu item
Audio
Navigation
Phone & Bluetooth
System
Display
Brightness
Display Mode
Scroll Direction
Clock
Time Format
Date Format
Clock Mode
Set Clock
Manually
Daylight Savings Time
Time Zone
Language
Camera
Display Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color
Result
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Touch this key to adjust the time.
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock
using the “Set Clock Manually” key.
Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must
be set to manual for this option to be available.
Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Adjust touch-screen color.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu item
Temperature Unit
Touchscreen click
System Beeps
Return to Factory Settings/
Clear Memory
Software Licenses
Traffic
SXM
Result
Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Toggles the touchscreen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched.
Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the
screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to “Audio System” regarding SXM setup in this
section.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to day or night display mode.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “REARVIEW
MONITOR” in this section regarding the CAMERA button.
button for more than
Press and hold the
2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button
again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio function
on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust
audio volume.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
view to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView
Monitor could result in serious injury or
death.
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows, and check mirrors to be sure that
it is safe to move before operating the
vehicle. Always back up slowly.
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help
avoid damaging the vehicle.
● The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
● Objects in a RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite than when
viewed in the rear view and outside
mirrors.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
● When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA0437
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
vehicle body line 䊊
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
● Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
● Yellow line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line 䊊
LHA2914
The on-screen guidelines can be set to on or off.
With the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position:
Press the CAMERA button to toggle the feature
on and off.
With the shift lever in any position other
than the R (Reverse) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the “Show Guidelines” key to toggle
the feature on or off.
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
● Green line 䊊
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place 䊊
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA2326
LHA2327
Backing up on a steep uphill
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place 䊊
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place 䊊
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place 䊊
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
A if the object projects over the
the position 䊊
actual backing up course.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display settings
of the screen differs depending on the type of
screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without Navigation System
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (reverse)
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the
setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to
display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the
setting up or down.
LHA2328
Backing up behind a projecting object
C is shown farther than the position
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the position 䊊
C is
䊊
A.
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to complete the adjustment.
● Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
For vehicles with Navigation System
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the shift
lever in R (reverse)
2. Press the
button on the control panel.
3. The screen will display the Night settings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up
or down.
5. Press the
Auto settings.
button again to access the
6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up
or down.
● Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
OPERATING TIPS
CAUTION
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the camera,
wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe
with a dry cloth.
● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
● When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the ENTER/AUDIO button or the
ENTER/SETTING button may not change
the brightness.
● It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has
been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be
distorted momentarily until the RearView
Monitor screen is displayed completely.
When the shift lever is returned to a position
other than R (Reverse), it may take some
time until the screen changes. Objects on
the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.
● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera.
● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.
VENTS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
WHA1128
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas1 , center vents 䊊
2 , and rear
senger’s side vents 䊊
3 by moving
passengers’ vents (if so equipped) 䊊
the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.
WHA1406
Type A (if so equipped)
CONTROLS
1. Fan speed control dial
2. Front window defroster button
3. Rear window defroster switch
(if so equipped)
4. Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial
6. Max A/C button
7. Air flow control buttons
8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
LHA3167
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Type B (if so equipped)
CONTROLS
1. Fan speed control dial
2. Front window defroster button
3. Outside mirror defroster switch (if so
equipped)
4. Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial
6. Max A/C button
7. Air flow control buttons
8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button
Air recirculation button
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling
(air conditioning).
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
ON position (Indicator light on)
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
button to the ON position when:
● driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
OFF position (Indicator light off)
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Use the OFF position for normal heater or air
conditioner operation.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and press the
button to
turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air
button again.
conditioner, press the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information about the rear window
or outside mirror defroster switch, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
button to the OFF position.
1. Press the
The indicator light on the
button will
go off.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position
for normal heating. The indicator light on
button will go off.
the
2. Press the
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
air flow control button.
1. Press the defrost/defog button
.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
mode automatithe windshield. The
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
button to the OFF position.
1. Press the
button will
The indicator light on the
go off.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Heating and defogging
Operating tips
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). If
air flow control button is selected
the
for more than 1 minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is
shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn off
the compressor even if the air flow control
dial is turned to a position other than
position. This dehumidifies the air
the
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off, alThe
lowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the
defogging performance.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
button to
desired position, and press the
activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to
perature is high, press the
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. The
indicator light on the
button will go off.
You may also select MAX A/C for quick
cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
The indicator light on the
button will
go off.
2. Press the
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
4. Press the
2. Press the
air flow control button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Press the
button on.
button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Press the
button.
or
positions are seWhen the
lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF, the
air conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is
air
shut off, even if a position other than the
flow control button is selected. This dehumidifies
the air which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off, allowing
The
outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Operating tips
● Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air
from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
on heating and cooling, refer to “Heater and air
conditioner (manual)” in this section. The air
) button should always
recirculation (
be in the OFF position for heating and
defrosting.
WHA0916
WHA0917
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
WHA0918
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WHA0919
WHA0920
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
LHA2611
1. Driver temperature control dial
11. AUTO button
2. A/C ON/OFF button
3. Front window defroster button
4. Fan speed control dial
5.
(system off) button
6. Rear window defroster button
7. Air recirculation button
8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button
10. Air flow control buttons
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
NOTE:
● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor
can enter the passenger compartment
through the vents.
● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside
the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature. Driver and
passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press DUAL to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s
side temperature control dial to the left or
right to set the desired passenger’s temperature.
● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off
are also controlled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the A/C button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.
● Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the defroster control button
to
turn the system on. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the manual fan control to the
maximum position.
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the auto mode.
control is activated, the air
● When the
conditioner will automatically be turned on at
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). If in
defrost mode for more than 1 minute, the air
conditioning system will continue to operate
until the fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off or the A/C button is used to
turn off the compressor even if an air flow
is selected. This
button other than
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control dial
Turn the fan speed control dial
left or right
to manually control the fan speed or turn the
system on or off.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Air recirculation
To turn system off
Push the air recirculation button
to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the
AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
Press the
The air recirculation button will not be activated
when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or
floor/defrost mode.
Fresh air intake (if so equipped)
Press the
fresh air intake button to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.
indicator light on the button will come
The
on.
Air flow control
Press the air flow control buttons to manually
control air flow and select the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
/OFF button.
Outside mirror defroster switch (if so
equipped)
For additional information about the outside mirror defroster switch, refer to “Rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
OPERATING TIPS
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LIC0836
1 , located on the top center
The sunload sensor 䊊
of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything
on or around this sensor.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
RADIO
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. For additional information, refer to “Air
conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service
should be done only by an experienced
technician with proper equipment.
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi(power) or ON•OFF button
tion, press the
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
CHECK DISC
● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
UNPLAYABLE
● CDs that are not round
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if
so equipped)
Terms
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WHA1078
Playback order chart
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1
WMA
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Cannot play
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front
seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB connection
port devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by
this system.
● Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
● Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and
care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the
iPod® is connected properly.
● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case,
please manually reset the iPod®.
● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
nano (2nd Generation).
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
● Large video files cause slow responses in an
iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
center display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.
Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
equipped)
● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth®
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Refer
to how to operate your audio device before
using it with this system.
● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
● While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
7.
TUNE
button
8. RPT (repeat) button
9. AUX IN jack
10. SCAN button
11. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control
knob
12. RDM (random) button
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14.
SEEK
button
For additional information on all operation precautions, refer to ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙
in this section.
Audio main operation
Power button and VOL control knob
LHA2057
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so
equipped)
1. FM·AM button
2.
CD eject button
3. CD button
4. CD insert slot
5. AUX button
6. MENU button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR (power) button. If
you listen to the radio with the engine not running,
place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The
mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR button again turns the system
off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase
volume or to the left to decrease volume.
MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,
BALANCE and CLOCK)
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
NOTE:
If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU
button will change the mode as follows:
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →
Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →
BAS
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → BAS
For additional information, refer to “Clock set” in
this section.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the MENU button until the desired mode appears
Clock operation
SEEK
butin the display. Press the
ton to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level.
SEEK
button
You can also use the
to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Since this vehicle is not equipped with rear
speakers, adjusting the fade to the rear of the
vehicle will reduce the volume until no sound is
played.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
Press the MENU button until CLOCK is disSEEK
button to turn
played; use the
the clock display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).
Clock set
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use
the
mode.
SEEK
button to enable CLK ON
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
CLOCK mode appears; press the
SEEK
button until CLK ON appears.
2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will
start flashing.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Press the
just the hour.
SEEK
button to ad-
4. Press the MENU button again; the display
will switch to the minute adjustment mode.
5. The minutes will start flashing. Press
SEEK
button to adjust the minutes.
6. Press the MENU button again to exit the
clock set mode.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button
again to return to the regular clock display.
Resetting the time
Hold the MENU button down and then press the
TUNE or SEEK button; the time will reset as
follows:
● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed
before the reset will stay the same and the
minutes will be reset to :00.
● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed
before the reset will advance by one hour
and the minutes will be reset to :00.
For example, if the MENU button and the TUNE or
SEEK button are pressed while the time displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display will
be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed
while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the
display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the
display will return to the audio.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1
The FM stereo indicator, ST (STEREO), illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE
buttons:
Manual tuning
TUNE
button for less than
Press the
0.5 seconds for manual tuning.
SEEK
buttons
SEEK tuning
SEEK
button to seek
Press the
through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins
from low to high frequencies, or high to low
frequencies, depending on which button is
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting station. Once the highest broadcasting station is
reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at
the lowest broadcasting station.
Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1 and 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be set for
the AM band to the preset buttons.
1. Press the FM-AM button to change to the
desired band.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)
To move quickly through the channels, press and
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
TUNE
hold either
more than 1.5 seconds.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
button down for
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE
(rewind and fast
forward) buttons
TUNE
button is pressed
When the
while the compact disc is playing, the compact
disc plays at an increased speed while rewinding
or fast forwarding. When the button is released,
the compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK
buttons
When
is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
several times to skip several tracks.
Press
Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
pears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
is pressed, the track being played
When
returns to the beginning. Press
several
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1 ←→ Normal
1: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.
RDM (random) button
AUX (Auxiliary) button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
CD EJECT button
CD eject button is pressed with
When the
a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
CD eject button is pressed
When the
while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.
When the RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
RDM ←→ Normal
RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
7. AUX IN jack
8. AUX button
9. CD button
10. AM button
11. FM button
12.
(power) button / VOL (volume) control knob
13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
14. TRACK
15.
button
SEEK button
For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.
Audio main operation
(power) button /VOL (volume) control knob
LHA2241
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so
equipped)
1.
CD eject button
2. CD insert slot
3. SCAN button
4. DISP (display) button
5. RPT (repeat) /RDM (random) button
6. MENU button /TUNE/FOLDER knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the
(power) button. If
you listen to the radio with the engine not running,
place the ignition in the ACC position. The mode
(radio or CD) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off resumes playing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
(power) button again turns
Pressing the
the system off.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and Clock)
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle’s driving
speed changes. It can be set as follows:
OFF → LOW → MID → HIGH
DISP (display) button
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the audio
display as follows:
For CDs:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Spd. Sen.
Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) → AUX IN Volume
→ Clock → Clock Adjust
Running Time → Album Title: → Artist Name: →
Song Title
To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance,
press the MENU button until the desired mode
SEEK or
appears in the display. Press the
button to adjust the setting to the
TRACK
desired level (-5 to +5). Balance adjusts the
sound between the right and left speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title: →
Artist Name: → Song Title:
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
For MP3 CDs:
If the text information is too long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is
playing to toggle the audio display between station number and RDS.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Clock operation
To turn the clock display on or off, press the
MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears
on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
toggle the setting (ON or OFF).
Clock set
1. Press the MENU button. and turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob until “Adjust Clock”
appears on the display.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. “Change Hour” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hours and then press MENU.
4. “Change Minute” will appear on the screen.
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
minutes and then press MENU.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is performed.
FM/AM radio operation
SCAN (tuning) button
Compact disc (CD) player operation
AM and FM buttons
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
Press the AM button to change the band to AM.
If another audio source is playing when the AM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
Press the FM button to change the band as
follows:
FM1 → FM2 → FM1
If another audio source is playing when the FM
button is pressed, the audio source playing will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will begin playing.
SEEK and TRACK (tuning)
buttons
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for
FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
Press the
SEEK button to tune from low to
high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
TRACK button to tune from high
Press the
to low frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
Press and hold either button to seek at a faster
speed.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
SEEK and TRACK (Fast
Forward, Rewind) buttons
SEEK button or
TRACK
When the
button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased
speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
SEEK and TRACK buttons
When the
SEEK button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginSEEK button several times
ning. Press the
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.
TRACK button is pressed, the
When the
track being played returns to the beginning.
TRACK button several times to
Press the
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
RPT (repeat) /RDM (random) button
Press the RPT (repeat) /RDM (random) button
while a compact disc is playing to change the
play pattern as follows:
CD:
TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC
REPEAT
MP3/WMA CD:
FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC
RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC REPEAT
TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.
DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the
disc will be mixed during play.
DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current
folder will be repeated.
FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in
the folder will be mixed during play.
SCAN (CDs) button
Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds
to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during
scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CD EJECT button
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.
If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the
disc will reload.
AUX (Auxiliary) button
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN
Volume” appears on the screen to control the
incoming volume level of the auxiliary input device. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
level between 0 and +3.
7. APPS button
8.
BACK button
9. ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/SCROLL
knob
10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11.
(power) button / VOL (volume) knob
12. DISP (display) button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*
15. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
XM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.
LHA3017
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
1.
CD eject button
For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.
3. RDM (random) button
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6.
SEEK/CAT buttons
2. RPT (repeat) button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the
(power) button
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
button.
(power)
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the
Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options
and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to
make a selection.
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume)
AUX Vol.
Brightness and Contrast
Clock adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Language
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of
the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides
no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the item
to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until the display returns to
the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
APPS button
Press the APPS button to launch the Smartphone Integration Mode. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM with Mobile
Apps” in this section regarding this feature.
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1* (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the last station played.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone system without Navigation” in
this section regarding connecting your phone.
The last station played will also come on when
(power) button is pressed to turn the
the
radio on.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
XM band select
Pressing the XM button will change the band as
follows:
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
TRACK button to tune from high
Press the
to low frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
Press and hold either button to seek at a faster
speed.
SCAN (tuning) button
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1,
six for FM2).
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button.
SEEK and TRACK (tuning)
buttons
2. Tune to the desired station using the
SEEK button or the
TRACK button.
Press and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and the
sound is briefly muted.
SEEK button to tune from low to
Press the
high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
SEEK and TRACK (Fast
Forward, Rewind) buttons
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
SEEK button or
TRACK
When the
button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased
speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc returns
to normal play speed.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until
the CD mode is displayed on the screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed.
SEEK and TRACK buttons
When the
SEEK button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginSEEK button several times
ning. Press the
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.
TRACK button is pressed, the
When the
track being played returns to the beginning.
TRACK button several times to
Press the
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
CD EJECT button
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal.
If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the
disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” regarding
the iPod® player available with this system in this
section.
For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without
Navigation System)” regarding the USB connection port available with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio without Navigation System”
about the Bluetooth® audio interface available
with this system in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available when the
SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.
Audio main operation
ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob
LHA2895
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
1.
CD eject button
2. FM-AM button
3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5.
Backward seek button and
Forward seek button
6. BACK button
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button while the
system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX,
Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
Audio settings
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following
items to the desired setting:
Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Vol.
AUX Volume Level/AUX Level
Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to
vehicle speed.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are
Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust. When the desired
item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not
pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
SXM settings
To view the SXM settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and other
information are displayed on the screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
SXM band select
Pressing the SXM button will change the band as
follows:
SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn the radio
on.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation
can be controlled through the touch-screen.
Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of
channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to
change to that channel. Touch the “Categories”
key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touch-screen. To bring up the visual
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
running from low frequencies on the left to high
frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To return to
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
key.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to
the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM
mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning
When in FM or AM mode, press the
or
seek buttons to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
or
When in SXM mode, press the
seek buttons to change the category.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching the
desired preset number on the screen.
LHA2899
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for
FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the
SXM band (six for SXM1, six for SXM2 & six
SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or choose
the radio band SXM1, SXM2 & SXM3 using
the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.
Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if so
equipped):
LHA3085
The Smart Favorites feature allows the user to
designate presets, within the SXM1, SXM2 and
SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any
of the Smart Favorite presets are selected, the
current track on that station will play from the
beginning of the song.
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate (ON)
or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6 station
memory operations” in this section regarding preset memory options.
REPLAY
To replay a track from the
beginning, press the
seek button. The user can
continue to press the
seek button to replay previous songs, but can only go
back as far as the system
permits. The system will warn
the user when they cannot
skip any further back by displaying “At the End” in the
bottom left corner of the
screen.
SKIP
To skip a track, press
the
track button. “Live”
will appear in the bottom left
corner of the screen indicating the difference from play
time to live audio.
PAUSE
To pause a track, press
the
pause button.
NOTE:
• Smart Favorites will start functioning only
after the audio unit is turned on for a few
minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music channels only.
LHA3087
Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability to
replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired
track.
When the “Replay” key is pressed, the Replay
Screen is prompted.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD
To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or
seek/track button.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode
Random/Mix
Repeat
Browse
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is
being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist,
album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel
Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat”
alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin
playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
or
seek buttons
Press and hold the
for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK buttons
Press the
seek button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginseek
ning of the current track. Press the
button several times to skip backward several
tracks.
seek button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
seek button several times to skip
Press the
forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the
last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
AUX button
The AUX IN audio input port accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN port.
CD EJECT button
CD EJECT button is pressed
When the
with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will eject and the last source will be played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the
disc will reload.
LHA2455
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod® player
operation with Navigation System” regarding the
iPod® player available with this system in this
section.
For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models with
Navigation System)” regarding the USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port available with
this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth®
streaming audio with Navigation System” regarding the Bluetooth® audio interface available with
this system in this section.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
● To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB connection port is located on the center
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to switch to
the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another
audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN
jack, the MEDIA button toggles between the
three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons
or
SEEK/CAT
Press and hold the
buttons for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The track plays at an
increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio file
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
several times to skip
SEEK/CAT button
backward several tracks.
while an audio
Press the TRACK button
file on the USB device is playing to advance one
several
track. Press the TRACK button
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed while
an audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed while
an audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device.
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
LHA2455
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAUTION
● To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB connection port is located on the center
console beneath the heater and air conditioner
controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the connection port, compatible audio files
on the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX (auxiliary) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB connection port device is
inserted, press the AUX button until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
LHA1496
Play information
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the
name of a song on the screen to begin playing
that song.
Seeking buttons
Press the
seeking button while an audio
file on the USB device is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
seeking button several times to skip backward
several tracks.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Press the
seeking button while an audio
file on the USB device is playing to advance one
seeking button several
track. Press the
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
Random and repeat play mode
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the random
icon is displayed to the
mode is active, the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which random pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until
icon is displayed.
no
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the repeat
icon is displayed to the
mode is active, the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat
icon
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
is displayed.
LHA2455
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect
the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery
will be charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB
connection port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3
or later)
● iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
● iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0PC or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later)
Audio main operation
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later)
● iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware version 3.1.3 or later)
● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware version 4.3.5 or later)
● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)
● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the CD·AUX or MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® is
playing, the iPod® plays when the audio system
is turned back on.
If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUX or
MEDIA button turns the audio system on and
plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system automatically begins playing tracks from the iPod®
when it is plugged into the port.
MEDIA button
Press the MEDIA button while the iPod® is connected to show the iPod® operation menu on the
audio display. Scroll through the menu list using
the
TUNE/SCROLL
knob.
Press
ENTER/SETTING button to select a menu item.
Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in
the following order:
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● Now playing
● iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
● Playlists
● iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
● Artists
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
● Albums
REPEAT (RPT)
BACK button
● Songs
When the RPT button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to
the previous menu.
● Podcasts
● Genres
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Shuffle songs
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
Owner’s Manual regarding each item.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RANDOM (RDM)
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the iPod®
will be played.
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod® will return to the
normal play speed.
When the RDM button is pressed while a track is
being played, the play pattern can be changed as
follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle →
Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be
played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will
be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAUTION
● Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the
USB device is connected correctly into
the USB port.
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device
out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover.
LHA2455
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be
a distraction. If distracted you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect
the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery
will be charged while connected to the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB
connection port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later)
● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)
● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later)
● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*
● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod® is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the
iPod® mode.
● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
functional.
LHA2911
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPod®.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Artists
● Albums
song” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the
“Repeat” key again until the text is no longer
illuminated.
● Genres
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons
● Songs
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the iPod®
will be played.
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode
LHA2907
Interface
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod® interface. Use the touch-screen,
BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate
the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For additional information, refer to the iPod®
Owner’s Manual regarding each menu item.
● Playlists
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle mode is
active, the text is illuminated. Touching the
“Shuffle” key once more will display the “Shuffle
songs” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch the
“Shuffle” key again until the text is no longer
illuminated.
SEEK/CAT button or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod® will return to the
normal play speed.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is
active, the text is illuminated. Touching the “Repeat” key once more will display the “Repeat
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.
LHA2279
LHA2775
Scrolling menus
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first character in the name. To
activate character indexing, touch and hold the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen.
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose the
number or letter to jump to in the list and then
press the ENTER/AUDIO button.
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
If no character is selected after 2 seconds, the
display returns to normal.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Select “Bluetooth”.
3. Select “Add Phone or Device”. This same
screen can be accessed to remove, replace
or select a different Bluetooth® device.
4. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. For additional
information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button for
play and the Preset 4 button for pause.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the
device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.
LHA2924
LHA2844
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
5. The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to initiate connecting from the
phone handset. The connecting procedure
of the cellular phone varies according to
each cellular phone model. For additional
information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth®
audio mode is displayed on the screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen.
LHA0049
CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous channel.
Volume control switch
● Press the ENTER button to show the SXM
Menu.
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
Menu control
switch/ENTER button
LHA2054
1.
2.
3.
SOURCE select switch
Tuning switch
Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
SOURCE select switch
Push the SOURCE select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence: AM → FM →
CD* → USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) →
Bluetooth® audio* (if so equipped) → AUX* →
AM
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
● Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.
SXM (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
iPod® (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
CD
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
● Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
USB (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
NISSANCONNECTSM WITH MOBILE
APPS (if so equipped)
Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped)
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
reverse or fast forward the current song.
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integration technology. This allows many compatible
Smartphone applications to be displayed and
easily controlled through the vehicle’s touchscreen.
NOTE:
AUX
ANTENNA
A compatible smartphone and registration
is required to use mobile applications or to
access connected features of certain vehicle applications.
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be
removed. When you need to remove the antenna,
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECTSM WITH MOBILE
APPS
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod
clockwise and hand tighten.
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to
register, visit the NissanConnectSM website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/
or
https://canada.nissanconnect.com (For Canada)
and sign up or create an account through the
prompts on the NissanConnectSM with Mobile
Apps. Once registered, download the NissanConnectSM App from your compatible phone’s
application download source and then log into
the application. If you already have an account
created through the App, please log in.
● Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
Menu.
CAUTION
● Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle operation.
● Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
● Be sure to fold down the antenna before the vehicle enters a garage with a
low ceiling.
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone
must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the
vehicle. For additional information on connecting
your phone, refer to Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System without Navigation System” or
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
NOTE:
For vehicles with navigation, Apple
iPhones REQUIRE the phone to be plugged
in via USB for NissanConnectSM Apps to
function.
For vehicles without Navigation, Apple
iPhones must be paired via Bluetooth for
NissanConnectSM Apps to function.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnectSM
Apps REQUIRES the phone to be paired via
Bluetooth.
NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)
APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
CAUTION
Once connected, the NissanConnectSM App will
search your phone to determine which compatible applications are currently installed. The user
will then choose which apps they want to bring
into their vehicle from the list of apps within the
“Manage My Apps” section of the NissanConnectSM App on their smartphone. The vehicle
will then download the in-vehicle interface for
each of these compatible applications. Once
downloaded, the user can access their selected
smartphone applications through the vehicle interface. For additional information on application
availability visit www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.canada.nissanconnect.com
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
the Mobile Entertainment System components. Do not use solvents or cleaning solutions.
LHA0389
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
above 158°F (70°C)].
● The Mobile Entertainment System is
designed for rear seat passenger viewing only.
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not
operate the system more than 15 minutes without
starting the engine.
WARNING
● The driver must not attempt to operate
the Mobile Entertainment System while
the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
LHA3197
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
EJECT button
DVD slot
ENTER button
NAVIGATION keys
DISPLAY button
MENU button
PLAY/PAUSE button
STOP button
Input jacks
MODE button
POWER on/off button
DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
CONTROLS
For additional information, refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” in this section for the function of each button.
LHA3198
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
POWER button
PAUSE button
PLAY button
FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
button
MENU button
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
NAVIGATION keys
BACK button
Numeric keypad
CLEAR button
ANGLE button
AUDIO button
SUBTITLE button
MODE button
DISPLAY button
ENTER button
TITLE button
NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVIOUS TRACK/CHAPTER button
18. STOP button
REMOTE CONTROL
For additional information, refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” in this section for the function of each button.
CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass screen breaks,
do not touch it. Doing so could result in
an injury.
● The screen rotates down to view and up
into the housing to store when not in
use. Ensure that the screen is latched
securely into the housing when stored.
LHA0315
FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con1 located at the bottom of the
trol receiver 䊊
screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC
(DVD)
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
SAA0720
SAA0721
Headphones
NOTE:
Power ON/OFF
For optimum infrared headphone performance, increase the volume on the rear
seat controller to the maximum level and
adjust the infrared headphone volume using the volume control on the headphones.
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
seat controller can cause static noise in the
infrared headphones.
Press the power button to turn the headphones
on or off.
Volume control
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume.
The headphones will automatically be turned off
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being discharged, keep the power supply turned off when
not in use.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
The driver must not attempt to wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full
attention may be given to vehicle operation.
While playing video CD media, this DVD player
does not guarantee complete functionality of all
video CD formats.
With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,
video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passengers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound independently of the front seat.
Press the AUX button located on the front controls to hear the sound of the DVD play through
the speakers.
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote
control.
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use
the headphones in the front seat.)
POWER on/off button
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the POWER button to turn the
DVD player on or off.
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
into the slot.
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the
DVD player will automatically turn on.
CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the
slot. This could damage the player.
MODE select button
Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video
source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks
on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,
White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =
Video input).
NEXT
CHAPTER/PREVIOUS
CHAPTER (Remote control only)
The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left
corner of the display for 4 seconds once the
mode is changed to AUX.
For additional information on how to use the input
jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input jacks” in this section.
or
PLAY
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or
the PLAY button on the remote control is
pressed, the player will play.
In play mode, the display will briefly show
on the upper left corner of the display.
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Remote control only)
Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
buttons to carry out the fast forward or fast reverse presentation at 5 times normal play speed.
Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
buttons again or PLAY button to resume the
normal play speed.
(NEXT CHAPTER) button is
When the
pressed while the DVD is playing, the program
next to the present one will start to play from its
beginning. Press several times to skip through
programs. The DVD will advance the number of
times the button is pressed. When the
(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the
program being played returns to its beginning.
Press several times to skip back through programs. The DVD will go back the number of times
the button is pressed.
or
PAUSE
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or
the PAUSE button on the remote control is
pressed, the player will pause playing of the
media. In pause mode, the player will show
on the upper left corner of the display until the
player is changed to another mode.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
STOP
Press the STOP button once to stop playing the
in the upper
media. The display will show
left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY
button is pressed again, it will resume at the
stored disc track and time position.
If the STOP button is pressed again when the
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize
the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,
it will ignore the last stored disc position and
upon receipt of the next play message, will begin
at the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.
EJECT
When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVD
loaded, it will be ejected.
in
The display will show the EJECT symbol
the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds
once the EJECT button is pressed.
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show
“NO DISC”.
If the DVD comes out and is not removed within
25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot to
protect it.
DISPLAY
verse and fast forward, and the display will
If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than
2 seconds, the display menu will appear on the
screen.
,
,
and
respecshow
tively in the upper left corner of the display for
4 seconds. (Faceplate feature only)
● The display menu will remain on the screen
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control
activations occur.
If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of the
NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) will
perform
the
following
functions:
next
chapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow
● Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate
within the display menu and use ENTER to
select the item.
● Holding the DISPLAY control on the faceplate for longer than approximately 2 seconds while in the display menu will reset the
display characteristics to their nominal values. (Faceplate feature only)
,
forward, and the display will show
and a forward arrow symbol respectively in the
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.
(Faceplate feature only)
If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is
pressed for more than 2 seconds, the media
track/time information will be displayed along the
bottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAY
control for more than 2 seconds will remove the
media track/time information from the display.
(Faceplate feature only)
If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION
KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
and Right within the menu.
NAVIGATION KEYS
In the display menu, press the ENTER button to
select items for modification, as per the onscreen instructions.
If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) will
perform
the
following
functions:
next
chapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ENTER
In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to select MENU items.
MENU
If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
the screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigate
within the menu and use ENTER to select the
item.
Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY
mode.
TITLE (Remote control only)
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle
through each available audio track.
ANGLE (Remote control only)
The operator can cancel the input
chapter/title/track number by actuating the
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the
3-second timer.
Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera
angle menu.
These functions can be used only for the DVD
discs which correspond to them.
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle
through each available angle.
Auxiliary input jacks
CLEAR (Remote control only)
Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media
to the “title” of the DVD.
Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric
inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the
3-second timer.
Press the TITLE button again to return to the
previous stop point and play.
NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remote
control only)
BACK (Remote control only)
Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access
disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their
numeric value.
Press the BACK button to exit the current active
menu and return to the previous menu.
SUBTITLE (Remote control only)
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle
selection menu.
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle
through each available subtitle.
AUDIO (Remote control only)
Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio
menu.
Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greater
than or equal to 10. Up to three digits can be
inputted when selecting the chapter/title/track
number.
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control
panel. Compatible devices such as video games,
camcorders and portable video players can be
connected to the auxiliary jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes.
● Yellow - video input
● White - left channel audio input
● Red - right channel audio input
To view the compatible device connected to the
AUX jacks, press the MODE button. For additional information, refer to “Mode select button” in
this section.
The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will
continuously shift the previously input number to
the “left”.
The chapter/title/track number will be automatically selected (if valid, based on media content) if
3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
● A new disc may be rough on its inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges using the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment
System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,
etc.).
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
above 158°F (70°C)].
● Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired using adhesive. Doing so may cause damage to the equipment.
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme
humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than
75%).
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contamination or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
CAUTION
● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
solutions when cleaning the video
system.
● Do not use excessive force on the monitor screen.
● Avoid touching or scratching the monitor screen as it may become dirty or
damaged.
LHA0049
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD
CAUTION
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
● Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
side of the DVD.
● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
● Always place discs in the storage case when
they are not being used.
● Do not put on any sticker or write anything
on either surface of the DVD.
● DVDs with a region code other than “1”.
A is displayed in a
The region code 䊊
small symbol printed on the top of the
B.
DVD 䊊
5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
NISSAN dealer for further assistance.
6. Re-program the radio presets.
● DVDs that are not round.
● DVDs with a paper label.
● DVDs that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges.
● Recordable
(DVD+R).
digital
video
discs
● Rewritable
(DVD+RW).
digital
video
discs
If a DVD with a paper label is used and
becomes jammed, you may be able to reset
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
following procedure:
1. Record the radio presets.
LHA0484
DVD player operation precautions
Do not use the following DVDs as they may
cause the DVD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from
the battery for 5 minutes.
3. Reconnect the negative battery terminal.
4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject
the DVD by pushing the eject button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
● When changing batteries, do not let dust or
oil get on the remote control and headphones.
FCC Notice:
LHA0318
Remote control and headphones
battery replacement
Replace the battery as follows:
1. Open the lid.
2. Replace batteries with new ones.
● Size AA (remote control)
● Size AAA (headphones)
and
ends on
Make sure that the
the batteries match the markings inside the
compartment.
3. Close the lid securely.
SAA0723
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, close the lid securely.
● If you will not be using the remote control for
long periods of time, remove the batteries.
● Replacement of the batteries is needed
when the remote control only functions at
extremely close distances to the DVD player
or not at all.
● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
● An improperly disposed battery can harm
the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
● A cellular phone should not be used for
any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of
cellular phones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If
your phone does not connect automatic
ally to the system, consult the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
LHA3209
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized or work properly.
Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, refer to “Troubleshooting
guide” in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the
telephone charges, cellular phone antenna
and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Initialization
Giving voice commands
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
button is
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the
and release the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
Operating tips
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition (VR) system, observe the following:
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Make sure the command is
said exactly as prompted by the system and
repeat the command in a clear voice.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
button on the
also press and hold the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing
button on the steering wheel. After
the
interrupting the system, wait for a beep before
speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
button and after the tone say, “Call
the
Redial”.
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. For
additional information, refer to
“Voice commands” and “During a
call” in this section.
LHA2454
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incoming call.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system is active, press and hold
the
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
LHA2775
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER button.
Menu Item
Bluetooth ON/OFF
On
Off
Add Phone or Device
Replace Phone
Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth on and off. Bluetooth must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth functionality on
Turns Bluetooth functionality off
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth phone to enter the PIN and complete the connection process.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press
button and say “Phone” to bring up the
the
phone command menu. The available options
are:
● Call
● Phonebook
● Recent Calls
● Messaging (if available)
● Show applications (if available)
“Call”
For additional information on the “Call” command, refer to “Making a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available under
“Phonebook”:
● (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a
list of options for that phonebook entry. The
system will say the name it interpreted based
on the voice command provided. If the name
is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear another
name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number.
Say “Record Name” to record a name for the
phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to
delete a recorded name for the phonebook
entry.
● List Names
Speak this command to have the system list
the names in the phonebook one by one
alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number
of the current name or “Send Text” to send a
text message to that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the
list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to
record a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phonebook
entry.
● Transfer Entry
This command can be used to transfer multiple contacts at a time. To enable manual
contact transfer capability, set “Phonebook
Download” to “Off” in the Setting menu. The
ability to transfer contacts via the OPP
Bluetooth profile depends on your mobile
phone. For additional information, refer to
your phone’s Owner’s Manual.
● Delete Entry
Speak this command to delete an entry in
the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete
by speaking the desired name or say “List
Names”.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available under
“Recent Calls”:
● Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the incoming call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of incoming calls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
● Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from
an entry in the phonebook, the name will be
displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of
the missed call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of missed calls.
● Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call
was to an entry in the phonebook, the name
will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone
number of the outgoing call will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”
to send a text message to that number. Say
“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
● Redial
Speak this command to call the last number
dialed.
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of
the last incoming call to the vehicle.
“Messaging”
1. Press the
Speak this command to access text messaging
functions. For additional information on these
commands, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.
2. The system will prompt you for a command.
Say “Call”.
“Show Applications”
Speak this command to display list of smartphone apps available.
NOTE:
Compatible smartphone and registration
necessary to access applications. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnectSM with Mobile Apps” in this section.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to the
vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
NOTE:
Available commands different if system is
in Manual Control mode. For additional information, refer to “Manual Control” in this
section.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
button.
3. Select one of the available voice commands
to continue:
● “(a name)” — Speak the name of a phonebook entry to place a call to that entry. The
system will respond with the name it interpreted from your command and will prompt
you to confirm that the name is correct. Say
“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear another name from the phonebook.
● “List Names” – Speak this command to have
the system list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Next Entry”
or “Previous Entry” to move through the list
alphabetically. Say “Select” once desired
contact is heard and displayed on screen.
Say “Dial” to dial the number of the current
name or say “Record Name” to record a
name for the current phonebook entry to be
assigned.
● “Phone Number” — Speak this command to
place a call by inputting numbers. For 7– to
10–digit phone number, speak the numbers.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number. For phone numbers with more digits or special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits
can be entered. Available special characters
are “start”, “pound”, “plus”, and “pause”.
When finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call.
Say “Correction” at any time in the process
to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted
number or character.
● “Redial” – Speak this command to dial the
number of the last outgoing call. The system
will display “Re-dialing <name/number>”.
The name of the phonebook entry will be
displayed if it available, otherwise the number being re-dialed will be displayed.
● “Call Back” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last incoming call. The
system will display “Calling back
<name/number>”. The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it available,
otherwise the number being called back will
be displayed.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected
to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, the call information is displayed on either
the vehicle information display or both the vehicle
information display and he control panel display.
button to accept the call. Press
Press the
the
button to reject the call.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button to
access additional options. Speak one of the following commands:
● “(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then say
“Send” or say “Correction” to change the
numbers entered.
● “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the command to mute or unmute the system.
● “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To transfer
the call back from the handset to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
button and confirm when
press the
prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting
functionality. If a call is received while another call
is already active, a message will be displayed on
button to hold the
the screen. Press the
active call and switch to the second call. Press
button to reject the second call.
the
While the second call is active, pressing
button will allow the same commands
the
that are available during any call and additional
commands:
● “Switch Call” – Speak this command to hold
the second call and switch back to the original call.
● “End Other Call” – Speak this command to
stay with the second call and end the original
call.
button to accept the call. Press
Press the
the
button to reject the call.
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
TEXT MESSAGING
WARNING
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check local
regulations before using the feature.
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
● Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
● Previous Entry
Some features may or may not be supported depending on connected device.
For additional information, refer to “Voice
commands” in this section.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Five
predefined messages and three custom
messages are available. To choose one of
the predefined messages, speak one of the
following:
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Messaging”.
3. Say “Send Text”.
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:
● “Driving, can’t text”
● “Call me”
● “On my way”
● “Running late”
● (A name)
● “Okay”
● Number
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Message”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
● Incoming Calls
● Outgoing Calls
NOTE:
● Missed Calls
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional
information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s
Manual for details and instructions.
If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or
“Missed Calls” is selected, the following additional commands will be displayed:
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
button.
● Send Text
2. Say “Messaging”.
● Next Entry
3. Say “Read Text”.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed
list. The system will ask to confirm before
deleting the phone.
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on
the steering wheel to scroll through all text messages if more than one are available. Press
button to exit the text message screen.
the
Press the
button to access the following
options for replying to the text message:
● Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed
list. When a selection is made, the system
will ask to confirm before proceeding. The
recorded phonebook for the phone being
deleted will be saved as long as the new
phone’s phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
● Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
● Read Text
Speak this command to read the text message again.
● Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
LHA2274
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
● Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously connected
phone from the displayed list.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER button:
● Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call
information displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming call information displayed in both the
vehicle information display and the center
display screen.
● Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
● Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic download of a connected phone’s phonebook.
● Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
● Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the SETTING button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
● New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the sound that
plays when a new text is received by a phone
connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System. The setting all the way to the
left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.
● Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text
messages displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming text messages displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center
display screen. Select “None” to have no
display of incoming text messages.
● Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that will be
available with the standard options when
sending a text message. To set a custom
message, send a text message to your own
phone number while the phone is connected
to the system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be set
while the vehicle is stationary.
● Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply function. When enabled, the vehicle will automatically send a predefined text message to
the sender when a text message is received
while driving.
● Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is sent
when the Auto Reply function is enabled.
Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the three
custom messages stored in the system.
● Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the vehicle
signature is added to outgoing text messages from the vehicle. This message cannot be changed or customized.
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
) button. At that
holding the PHONE/END (
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
LHA3210
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
● For additional information, refer to “Toubleshooting guide” in this section if the hand
hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
● The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.
5. Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your
Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed
on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to
complete the pairing process.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to
Bosch.
For additional information, refer to
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.
VOICE COMMANDS
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice
Recognition System” in this section.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system, the
system voice can be interrupted to allow the user
to speak commands. While the system is speakbutton on the steering
ing, press the
wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will
be heard. After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example, press
button and after the tone say, “Call
the
Redial”.
the
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the
LHA2773
button on the control panel.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed
list.
NOTE:
4. The number of the entry will be displayed on
the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
1. Press the [
panel.
] button on the control
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
choose a letter or number and then press
ENTER. The list will move to the first entry
that begins with that number or letter.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
● Touch the green phone icon on the screen.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control panel.
The “Phone” screen will appear on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry
stored in the vehicle phonebook.
● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the incoming, outgoing or missed.
● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the
vehicle.
”Input the phone number manually
● “
using a keypad displayed on the screen. For
additional information on how to use the
touch-screen, refer to “How to use the
touch-screen” in this section.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected phone,
the display will change to phone mode.
To reject the incoming call, either:
● Press the
wheel, or
button on the steering
● Touch the red phone icon on the screen.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options are
available on the screen:
● “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of the
phone call over to the handset.
● “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone.
Select again to unmute the microphone.
) icon
● Red phone (
Select to end the phone call.
ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the red phone (
)
icon on the screen or press the
button on
the steering wheel.
To accept the incoming call, either:
● Press the
wheel, or
TEXT MESSAGING
button on the steering
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of “Text-to-Speech.” Check local regulations before using the
feature.
● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict
the use of some of the applications and
features, such as social networking and
texting. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
● Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location.
If you have to use the feature while
driving, exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while using the text
messaging feature, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
Some features may or may not be supported depending on connected device.
The system allows for the sending and receiving
of text messages through the vehicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
wheel.
button on the steering
● “Call me”
● “On my way”
● “Running late”
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
● “Okay”
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
● “Yes”
4. The system will provide a list of available
commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the
following:
● “No”
● To (a name)
● Enter Number
● Missed Calls
● Incoming Calls
● Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these options, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send. Nine
predefined messages and three custom
messages are available. To choose one of
the predefined messages, speak one of the
following after the tone:
● “Driving, can’t text”
button to exit the
are available. Press the
text message screen. Press the
button to
access the following options for replying to the
text message:
● Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender of
the text message using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
● “Where are you?”
● “When?”
To send one of the custom messages, say
“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will
prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on
setting and managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.
● Send Text
Speak this command to send a text message
response to the sender of the text message.
● Read Text
Speak this command to read the text message again.
● Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
● Next Text
Speak this command to move to the next text
message (if available).
button on the steering
NOTE:
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The text message, sender and delivery time are
shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to
scroll through all text messages if more than one
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
LHA2844
Menu Item
Phone Settings
Connect New Device
Select Connected Device
Replace Connected Device
Delete Connected Device
Bluetooth
Result
For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust
the following settings as desired:
● Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
● Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on
the SIM card. Touch “Both” to use both
sources.
● Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to the
vehicle from the chosen source.
● Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook
entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recognition System.
● Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications
shown in the vehicle information display.
Touch “Both” to have phone notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen.
● Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom message to edit. There are 4 customer message
slots available.
● Text Messaging:
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.
● Show Incoming Text for:
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifications shown in the vehicle information display. Touch “Both” to have text notifications
shown in both the vehicle information display
and the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.
● Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality
on or off.
● Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to be
sent when “Auto Reply” function is activated.
● Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the
vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Command not recognized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation
systems.
● If you want to cancel the command or go
back to the previous menu of commands,
button. The system will anpress the
nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or
“Go back” depending on the current menu
level.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the steering wheel.
the
When prompted, speak the command for the
system you wish to activate. The command given
is picked up by the microphone and performed
when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice response and a
message in the center display to inform you of the
command results.
● Press the BACK button on the control panel
to move back through the menus displayed
on the screen.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
button is pressed before the initializathe
tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice
Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”
LHA3187
Giving voice commands
1. Press the
button.
2. The system announces: “Please say a category like phone or a command like points of
interest followed by a brand name”. A list of
available commands is then spoken by the
system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the display changes, speak a command.
Available commands are discussed in this
section.
4. Voice and display feedback are provided
when the command is accepted.
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, use the volume control switches
on the steering wheel or the volume knob on
the control panel.
● The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
Operating tips
How to say numbers
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the following
example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number
and then speak the phone number in any of the
following formats:
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
LHA3515
SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems:
● Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
● Navigation
● Audio
● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”
● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Also,
full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For
example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.
● Information
● My Apps
For additional information on the navigation system, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle
phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say
“Phone” to access various phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would
you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and the
vehicle is stationary, the system announces:
“There is no phone connected. Would you like to
connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a
phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to
“On”, the following voice commands are available:
● Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in which you
are trying to call. System will confirm correct
contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.
● Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After
the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate
dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the number entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the
main menu.
● List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts
for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call
the number of the phonebook entry. Say
“Send Text” to send a text message to the
number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next
Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in
the vehicle phonebook, where the same options will then be available.
● Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls”
or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such
calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on
the screen to dial that number or say “Next
Page” to view entries on the next page (if
available).
● Redial
Redials the last called number.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Read Text
Reads an incoming text message. For additional information about text messaging with
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,
refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System with Navigation System” in this section.
● Send Text
Sends a text message. For additional information about text messaging with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
● Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual controls to continue”. Use manual controls to
change the active phone from among the
listed phones connected to the vehicle.
For additional information about the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
● Play (AM, FM, etc.)
The following voice commands are available for
the Navigation System:
● Tune AM (number)
● Street Address (address)
● Points of Interest (name)
● POI by Category
● Home
● Address Book
● Previous Destinations
● Enter Address in Steps
● Cancel Route
Allows user to select radio band
Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM
frequency
● Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM
frequency
● SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
● CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
For additional information about these commands, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
● Play Song (name)
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
● Play Artist (name)
To access the audio system voice commands:
● Play Album (name)
1. Press the button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following available commands:
Allows user to select song name to be
played
Allows user to select artist to be played
INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for
the information functions of the Navigation System:
● Traffic
● Fuel Prices
● Stocks
● Movie Listings
● Current Weather
● Weather Map
● 5 — day Forecast
● 6 — hour Forecast
For additional information about these commands, refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this voice
command. For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnectSM with Mobile Apps” in this
section.
Allows user to select album name to be
played
For additional information about the audio system, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
HELP VOICE COMMANDS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The following voice commands can be spoken to
have the system provide instructions and tips for
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are
listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting
with number one, until the problem is resolved.
● List Commands
● What Can I Say?
● General Help
● Quit
● Exit
Symptom/error message
The system responds “Command Not
Recognized” or the system fails to recognize the command correctly.
Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MEMO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
5-2 Starting and driving
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with
one of these open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the liftgate or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all four tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
● The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Starting and driving 5-3
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After your tires are inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display when
the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off
when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
5-4 Starting and driving
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check
the tire pressure for all four tires.
● You can also check the pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen.
The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond
with the actual order of the tire position. For
additional information, refer to “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.
● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (For additional information,
refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section for changing a flat
tire.)
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
FCC Notice:
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
This gives them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-5
For additional information, refer to “Driving safety
precautions” in this section.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all
traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high
speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,
because these driving practices could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause
the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss
of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).
Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the
“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also
instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
5-6 Starting and driving
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or
“blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the
vehicle by following the procedure below. Please
note that this procedure is only a general guide.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service to
change the tire. For additional information,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is
true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)
and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability to
operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,
drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less
capable than 4-wheel drive models for rough
road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
snow or mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
● Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
● Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tip over sideways much more easily
than they can forward or backward.
Starting and driving 5-7
● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you may stall. If
you drive down them, you may not be
able to control your speed. If you drive
across them, you may roll over.
● Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as
far forward and as low as possible. Do
not equip the vehicle with tires larger
than specified in this manual. This could
cause your vehicle to roll over
● Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could
tip or roll over. Always back straight
down in R (Reverse) gear and apply
brakes to control your speed.
● Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed.
● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.
5-8 Starting and driving
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers have
their seat belts fastened.
● Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected
by strong side winds. Slower speeds
ensure better vehicle control.
● Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
engaged.
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the other two
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may
result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
IGNITION SWITCH
● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive vehicle has
a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of
control and/or a rollover accident.
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
● Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
may be required. For additional information, refer to “Periodic maintenance”
in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”
WARNING
● Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK position
while driving. The steering wheel will
lock (for models without NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
● Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For
additonal information, refer to “Wet
brakes” in the “Brake system”in this
section.
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
Starting and driving 5-9
To remove the key from the ignition switch:
1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position
with the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position or when the ignition switch cannot be
placed in the LOCK position, proceed as follows
to remove the key.
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.
For models without NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system: when the ignition switch is
in the OFF position, the steering wheel is
not locked.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition
to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
WSD0041
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position
and the key cannot be removed until the shift
lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward the
ON position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
If the key will not turn from the LOCK position, turn the steering wheel to the left or
right while turning the key to unlock the key
cylinder.
When removing the key from the ignition switch,
make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
4. Remove the key.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position.
The shift lever is designed so it cannot move out
of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position or if the key is removed from the switch.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition
switch is in the ON position and the foot
brake pedal is depressed.
5-10 Starting and driving
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Check that all doors are closed.
● Position
seat
and
restraints/headrests.
adjust
head
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
Starting and driving 5-11
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position or if the key
is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift lever is in any of the driving
positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by placing the ignition
switch in the START position. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5–6 seconds. After
5-12 Starting and driving
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
In cold weather, keep the engine running for
a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it
off. Starting and stopping the engine over a
short period of time may make the vehicle
more difficult to start.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
ENGINE PROTECTION MODE
The engine has an engine protection mode to
reduce the chance of damage if the coolant temperature becomes too high (for example, when
climbing steep grades in high temperature with
heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).
When the engine temperature reaches a certain
level:
● The engine coolant temperature gauge will
move toward the H position.
● Engine power may be reduced.
● The air conditioning cooling function may be
automatically turned OFF for a short time
(the blower will continue to operate).
Engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be
controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the
vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.
The transmission will downshift or upshift as it
reaches prescribed shift points. You can also
shift manually.
1. The engine coolant temperature is not reduced.
2. The air conditioning cooling function does
not turn back ON.
3. The engine oil pressure low/engine coolant
illumitemperature high warning light
nates, this may indicate a malfunction. Move
the vehicle off the road in a safe area and
allow the engine to cool. If after checking the
remains on, do not
oil and coolant, the
continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer.
The malfunction indicator light (MIL) may also
come ON. If only it remains on, you do not need
to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected
soon by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer to “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls ” section of this
manual.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
As driving conditions change and engine coolant
temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be
increased using the accelerator pedal, and air
conditioning cooling function will automatically
be turned back ON.
If:
Starting and driving 5-13
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Always
depress the brake pedal until shifting is
completed. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Coasting with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause serious
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brake should be used for this purpose.
5-14 Starting and driving
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed so
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
position while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK or OFF position.
WSD0187
To move the shift lever:
: Shift while depressing the brake pedal
: Shift without depressing brake pedal
Shifting – console (if so equipped)
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away
and result in serious personal injury or
property damage
If the key is turned to the OFF position for any
reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D
(Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any
drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking
brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake first, then move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position.
R (Reverse)
4H:
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
62 MPH (100 km/h)
4LO:
31 MPH (50 km/h)
3 (Third gear)
Use this position for driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.
2 (Second gear):
N (Neutral)
Use this position for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 2 position.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
4 (Fourth gear):
Use this position for driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.
Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 4 position.
2WD and AUTO:
71 MPH (115 km/h) without tow mode
62 MPH (100 km/h) with tow mode
4H:
62 MPH (100 km/h) without tow mode
62 MPH (100 km/h) with tow mode
4LO:
31 MPH (50 km/h) without tow mode
Starting and driving 5-15
27 MPH (44 km/h) with tow mode
WARNING
1 (Low gear):
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is
in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away
and result in serious personal injury or
property damage.
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 1 position.
2WD and AUTO:
43 MPH (70 km/h) without tow mode
37 MPH (60 km/h) with tow mode
4H:
LSD2099
To move the shift lever:
43 MPH (70 km/h) without tow mode
: Shift while depressing the brake pedal
37 MPH (60 km/h) with tow mode
: Shift without depressing brake pedal
4LO:
19 MPH (30 km/h) without tow mode
16 MPH (27 km/h) with tow mode
5-16 Starting and driving
Shifting – column (if so equipped)
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park)
position.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned
to the LOCK position and be removed from the
ignition switch. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any
drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking
brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake first, then move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position.
R (Reverse)
M4 (Fourth):
For driving up or down long slopes where engine
braking would be advantageous.
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in
the meter.
M3 (Third):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
WSD0188
Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
A is
When the manual shift mode button 䊊
pressed while driving, the transmission enters the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. After
pressing the manual shift mode button, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth)
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→D
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3
M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in
the meter.
M2 (Second):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 ←→ M2
M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in
the meter.
Starting and driving 5-17
M1 (First):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on
the meter.
● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than M4
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up:
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to
higher range.)
When shifting down:
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side. (Shifts
to lower range.)
● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
● Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
5-18 Starting and driving
When canceling the manual shift mode:
A to return
Press the manual shift mode button 䊊
the transmission to the normal driving mode.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear
immediately because of vehicle speed.
The transmission will up or down shift
when vehicle speed matches the programmed transmission shift points.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission will not up shift to a higher gear
than is manually selected. When the
vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
LSD0090
Console shift (if so equipped)
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not
be moved from the P (Park) position even with the
brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift lever, release the shift lock. The
shift lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However,
for models without the NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system, the steering wheel will be locked
unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. This allows the vehicle to be moved if
the battery is discharged.
5. Use a protective cloth on the end of a small
screwdriver before inserting it in the shift
lock release slot and pushing down.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
6. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
7. For models without the NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system, turn the key to the ON
position to unlock the steering wheel.
8. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
LSD0101
Column shift (if so equipped)
To push the shift lock release, complete the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
and remove the key
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. On vehicles equipped with a column shifter,
tilt the steering wheel down to the lowest
position.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),
have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic
transmission system as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the
stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning
stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note
that the transmission will be locked in any of the
forward gears according to the condition.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition
switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then
turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
return to its normal operating condition,
have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary.
4. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.
Starting and driving 5-19
PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
LSD0158
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
5-20 Starting and driving
● The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ON
while
pushing
the
ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, use the
following procedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
LSD2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
ACCEL/RES switch
COAST/SET switch
CANCEL switch
ON·OFF switch
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
vehicle information display will illuminate. Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
maintains the set speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
● In very windy areas.
● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the vehicle information display goes
out.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the vehicle information display go out.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light illuminates in the vehicle information
display then blinks to warn the driver. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.
● If the SET indicator light blinks, push the
cruise control ON·OFF switch off and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the vehicle information display will illuminate.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
Starting and driving 5-21
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the vehicle information display
goes out if:
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
● You depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
The preset speed is deleted from memory.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
● The vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
● You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of
the following three methods:
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
5-22 Starting and driving
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened
engine
life
and
reduced
engine
performance.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 RPM.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Avoid quick starts.
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi
(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy
from your vehicle.
● Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
● Avoid rapid starts and stops.
● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.
● Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops.
● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
● Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency
due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary
braking.
● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
● Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on flat
terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling
● Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
● Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
economy.
● Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling.
Starting and driving 5-23
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
● Keep your engine tuned up.
● Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system.
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
, use 4H
● For vehicles equipped with
or 4L position only when necessary. Fourwheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.
● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
5-24 Starting and driving
USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the other two
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may
result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface
roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position with the brake pedal depressed, and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Starting and driving 5-25
TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
PROCEDURES
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions
(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the
desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
4WD Shift Switch
Position
Wheels Driven
4WD shift
Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position
Use Conditions
Rear wheels
For driving on dry, paved
roads (Economy drive)
4 wheels
For driving on rocky,
sandy or snow-covered
roads
2WD
4H
(N) Neutral
*1
May blink
4LO
4 wheels
Illuminated
5-26 Starting and driving
(N) Neutral disengages
the automatic transmission mechanical parking
lock, which will allow the
vehicle to roll. Do not
leave the transfer shift
position in (N) Neutral.*2
For use when maximum
power and traction is required (for example: on
steep grades or rocky,
sandy, muddy roads)
4WD Shift Procedure
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> 4H
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift
position engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SELECT TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION.
PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING
STRAIGHT.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, move the shift
lever to the N position.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, depress and
turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS
YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
SHIFT LEVER TO (N) NEUTRAL. *3
*1: Before moving the shift lever from (N) Neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed
and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,
not engage correctly or stay in the (N) Neutral position.
- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ⬙OFF⬙.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (N) Neutral position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from (N) Neutral position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.
indicator light will also turn on when
Starting and driving 5-27
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the
driving conditions. There are three types of drive
modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to
move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, shift the shift lever to
(N) Neutral, and depress the brake pedal.
The switch must be pushed and turned to
select 4LO.
WARNING
● When parking, apply the parking brake
before stopping the engine and make
sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is
on and the ATP warning light goes off.
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position.
● The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off
before shifting the transmission into
gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the
“N” position to any other gear when the
4LO indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly.
5-28 Starting and driving
CAUTION
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
● The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will
cause increased fuel consumption and
higher oil temperatures, and could
damage drivetrain components. Speeds
over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is not
recommended.
● The 4LO position provides maximum
power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 MPH
(50 km/h).
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
making a turn or reversing.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
brake and low automatic transmission
gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
wheels spinning.
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
unnecessary noise and tire wear.
NISSAN recommends driving in the
2WD position under these conditions.
● The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the transfer
4LO position indicator light may blink
even when the 4WD shift switch is
shifted. After driving for a while you can
change the 4WD transfer case between
4H and 4LO.
When driving on rough roads,
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● Drive carefully according to the road surface
conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck,
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential
(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the
switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and
apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.
● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the
vehicle back and forth between reverse and
drive gears.
● When the vehicle is stopped after making a turn, you may feel a slight jolt
after the shift lever is shifted to N or P.
This occurs because the transfer clutch
is released and not because of a malfunction.
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
stones or wooden blocks under the tires.
Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire
chains may be effective.
CAUTION
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
making a turn or reversing.
CAUTION
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.
LSD0145
4WD shift switch operations
● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the
2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on
driving conditions.
● If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you
may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
driving on steep downhill grades. Use
the engine brake and low automatic
transmission gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
with the rear wheels spinning.
● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH
(100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage
the 4WD system.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
Starting and driving 5-29
● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD indicator light goes out.
CAUTION
LSD0147
4WD shift indicator light
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the
vehicle information display.
● If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD
shift switch is shifted to the 4H position
at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD
mode may be being engaged due to
malfunctioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the
4WD warning light comes on, have the
system checked by the nearest NISSAN
dealer.
4WD warning light
Warning light
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position selected by
the 4WD shift switch.
● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to
the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator light will
come on.
5-30 Starting and driving
Comes on
Blinks
slowly
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the
engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system
when the key switch is ON, the warning light will
either remain illuminated or blink.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.
A large difference between the diameters of front
and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
slowly (about once per 2 seconds). Change the
4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast.
CAUTION
Comes on or blinks
when:
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
slowly during operation or rapidly after
stopping the vehicle for a while, have
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
There is a malfunction in the
4–wheel drive
system
● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
recommended when the 4WD warning
light turns on.
The difference in
wheel rotation is
large
The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
● When the warning light comes on, the
2WD mode may be engaged even if the
4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially
careful when driving. If corresponding
parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD
mode will not be engaged even if the
4WD shift switch is shifted.
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,
move the automatic transmission
shift lever to the N position with the
brake pedal depressed, and shift the
4WD shift switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
● The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking.
The E-Lock system can provide additional traction and should only be used when a vehicle has
become or is becoming stuck. This system operates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive
wheels together, allowing them to turn at the
same speed. The system is used when it is not
possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using
the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles).
When added traction is required, activate the
E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. For
additional information, refer to “Electronic locking
rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” in the
“Instruments and Controls” section of this
manual. Once the system fully engages, the indicator light in the instrument panel will remain ON.
When the system is activated, both rear wheels
will engage, providing added traction.
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to
engage the system, and the system will only
engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).
Once the vehicle is free, the system should be
turned OFF and driving resumed.
WARNING
● Never leave the E-Lock system ON when
driving on paved or hard-surfaced
roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
the rear wheels slipping and result in an
accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system OFF.
● Use the E-Lock system only when freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position
before using the E-Lock system. Never
use the E-Lock system on a slippery
road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when
driving in these road conditions may
cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an
accident and serious personal injury.
The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
Starting and driving 5-31
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
CAUTION
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended
use.
● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster
than 12 MPH (20 km/h) when the system is engaged. Doing so could damage
drivetrain components.
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while
the tires are spinning. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
WSD0050
WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift
lever has been pushed as far forward as
it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.
5-32 Starting and driving
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
A
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C
CURB: 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Starting and driving 5-33
WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors
are replaced, in order to assure the best brake
performance.
5-34 Starting and driving
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section
of this manual.
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
Using the system
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action
is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated
generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. it is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
● ABLS system uses automatic braking to
transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to
the wheel on the same axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to
the slipping wheel, which helps redirect
power to the other wheel.
● On 4WD models the ABLS system operates
in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is
engaged, the ABLS system operates for
both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the
ABLS system operates on the drive axle
only.
● The ABLS system is always ON. In some
conditions, the system may automatically
turn the ABLS system off. If the system is
automatically turned off, normal brake function will continue. ABLS will function even
when the VDC system is turned OFF.
● The ABLS does not operate if both wheels
on a drive axle are slipping.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
Starting and driving 5-35
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
● The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent
accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous
driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed
and be especially careful when driving
and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely
deteriorated, the ABLS system may not
operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and
the slip indicator light may illuminate.
● Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the ABLS system may not
operate properly and the slip indicator
light may illuminate.
● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the ABLS
system may not operate properly and
the slip indicator light may illuminate.
5-36 Starting and driving
● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO
indicator light will come on and
the
the VDC system will be turned off. For additional information, refer to “Using 4-wheel
drive (4WD)” in this section.
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steering input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.
indiWhen the VDC system operates, the
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:
● The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator
light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
indicator light will come on in the instrument
panel. The VDC system automatically turns off
when these indicator lights are off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
indicator illuminates to indisystem. The
cate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
indicator will not
functions are off and the
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to ON
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may
formance, and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
indicaoperate properly and the
tor light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
indicator light
deteriorated, the
may illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the
system optimizes the distribution of force to each
of the four wheels depending on the radius of the
turn.
Starting and driving 5-37
REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain controllability but cannot prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or by
careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be
especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always
drive carefully.
● The active trace control and brake force
distribution systems may not be effective depending on the driving condition.
Always drive carefully and attentively.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the VDC warning
light may illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC warning light may
illuminate.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly and
the VDC warning light may illuminate. Do
not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the VDC warning light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart
the engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the VDC warning light may illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
5-38 Starting and driving
WSD0103
WARNING
● Always turn and look back before backing up. The RSS is not a substitute for
proper backing procedures.
● Read and understand the limitations of
the rear sonar system as contained in
this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the RSS; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
● This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the
rear bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may
be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper
when the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system
may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet (1.8 m)
from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to
the illustration for approximate zone coverage
areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is
less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone
will sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system
detects an object approaching, the tone will
sound again.
The RSS automatically turns on when the shift
lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is
ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrument
panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off.
To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, and
the shift lever in R (Reverse). An indicator light on
the switch will illuminate when the system is
turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when
the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect
the accuracy of the RSS.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so
equipped).
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For
additional information, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For additional information, refer to “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Starting and driving 5-39
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
5-40 Starting and driving
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold
temperature starting.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system or
a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
Starting and driving 5-41
MEMO
5-42 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
FLAT TIRE
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
6-2 In case of emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in
the vehicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure
warning light. This system will activate only when
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire
pressure information” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the shift lever is shifted into
P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
In case of emergency 6-3
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Fold up the rear bench seat. For additional
information, refer to “Folding the rear bench
seat” in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
LCE2142
LCE2183
A.
Blocks
2. Remove the tool kit.
B.
Flat tire
3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the storage location by inserting the wheel-nut
wrench into the jack screw at the top of the
jack as shown. Turn the wheel-nut wrench
counterclockwise until the jack screw becomes loose. Then loosen the jack with your
fingers until the jack is free.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back
of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked
up.
4. Remove the jack.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
10. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the
spare tire.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
WCE0150
WCE0151
5. Assemble the two pieces of the jack rod.
Find the oval-shaped opening above the
middle of the license plate. Pass the
T-shaped end of the jack rod through the
opening and direct it toward the spare tire
winch, located directly above the spare tire.
6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the
square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form
a handle.
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
7. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into
the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in
the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.
8. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,
reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer
chain and carefully slide the tire from under
the rear of the vehicle.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
9. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse
steps 1 through 4.
In case of emergency 6-5
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
WCE0152
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
placement and jack-up points for your specific
vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.
6-6 In case of emergency
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the
tire.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
LCE0087
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
tire clears the ground.
In case of emergency 6-7
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in
the
sequence
illustrated
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 ). Lower the vehicle
1 ,䊊
(䊊
completely.
WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
WCE0063
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 ).
they are tight (䊊
6-8 In case of emergency
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
101 ft-lb (137 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mi. (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label affixed to
the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display(if so equipped) of
the tire pressure information may show
higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more
than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tire
pressure increases as the tire temperature
rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking
equipment in the vehicle. For additional information about storing the flat tire, refer to
the “Getting the spare tire and tools” section
of this manual.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-9
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
LCE2187
WARNING
3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the
charging system and cause personal
injury.
4. Remove the Fuse/fusible link box and connect jumper cables in the sequence illusA,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
trated (䊊
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
6-10 In case of emergency
CAUTION
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
PUSH STARTING
WARNING
Do not push start this vehicle. The 3-way
catalyst may be damaged.
CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be
push-started or tow-started. Attempting
to do so may cause transmission damage.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading and
the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. If steam or coolant
is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open
the hood further until no steam or coolant
can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time.
In case of emergency 6-11
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
** Click HERE to see "Owner's Manual Supplement" beginning on page 2. **
6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and
local regulations for towing must be followed.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage your
vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to
prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,
NISSAN recommends having a service operator
tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
6-12 In case of emergency
For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “Technical and Consumer
Information” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
LCE2141
Four-Wheel Drive models
Two-Wheel Drive models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
transfer case and transmission.
LCE2140
In case of emergency 6-13
● Attach recovery devices only to main
structural members of the vehicle or the
recovery hooks.
CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may cause damage to the
lock mechanism (if so equipped).
When towing long distances or speeds in excess
of 60 mph, remove the propeller shaft before
towing to prevent damage to the transmission.
See your NISSAN dealer for more information.
6-14 In case of emergency
LCE0083
Recovery hooks (if so equipped)
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal
injury or death when recovering a stuck
vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) System (if so equipped).
3. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
● Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
(55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h) if
the E–Lock System (if so equipped) is
engaged.
6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
● after driving on coastal roads
● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care
CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
CAUTION
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
UNDERBODY
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification
sensor. This can also affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.
● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front
position.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
7-4 Appearance and care
● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
● Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. For additional information,
refer to your NISSAN dealer.
● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning aid.
For additional information, refer to ⴖFloor
mat positioning aidⴖ in this section.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. For additional information,
refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety –
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
LAI0009
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor
mat brackets and one passenger’s side front floor
mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.
Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially
designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s side
floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in
it and the passenger’s side has one grommet
hole. Position each mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet
holes while centering the mat in the floorwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
● the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas
● damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic collisions
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Appearance and care 7-5
Temperature
CAUTION
Air pollution
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
7-6 Appearance and care
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money;
however, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
● For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Inside the vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found in this section.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) position
mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head
restraints/headrests move up and down
smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold
securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for seviceable batteries) Check the
fluid level in each cell. It should be between the
MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, refer to the carbon monoxide
warning in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For
additional information, refer to the “Appearance
and care” section of this manual.
Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift lever to P
(Park)
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. Refer to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
LDI2482
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Battery
Fuse/fusible link box
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information,
refer to precautions in “If your vehicle
overheats” found in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
● Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
● When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection
is needed due to weather where you
operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will
reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to
the NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
For additional information on the location of the
engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
LDI2578
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 168,000 km
(105,000 miles) or 7 years. Mixing any other type
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.
WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine
is hot. Serious burns could be caused by
high pressure fluid escaping from the
radiator.
ENGINE OIL
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
LDI0370
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.
LDI0371
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A , remove the oil filler cap
the L (Low) mark 䊊
and pour recommended oil through the
C.
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B.
䊊
B with a wrench by
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in
this section.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
LDI2610
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
34 N·m (26 ft-lb)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
For additional information on drain and refill
capacity,
refer
to
“Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
LDI2627
2WD (if so equipped)
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
A and cover.
3. Remove bolts 䊊
4. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊.
B
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench
by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to an
oil leak and engine damage.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
LDI2626
4WD (if so equipped)
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Install cover in reverse order of removal.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
oil if necessary.
5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
CAUTION
● Recommended
fluid
is
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not
available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
may also be used.
● Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the
automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also
described on caution labels located in the engine
compartment.
Genuine
WDI0256
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
BRAKE FLUID
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface with
water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake
fluid is below the MIN line, the brake warning light
will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line.
For addition information, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities⬙ in the “ Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual for the recommended type of brake fluid.
LDI0374
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of reach of children.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the
brake system should be thoroughly checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
WDI0405
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.
● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
CAUTION
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
● Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
NOTE:
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only
driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain
battery health.
WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen
gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or
painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
WDI0529
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
A is located near the battery
The current sensor 䊊
along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual for additional information. If the engine
does not start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0566
CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
DRIVE BELT
SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
WDI0661
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Power steering fluid pump pulley
Automatic belt tensioner pulley
Water pump pulley
Cooling fan pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Generator pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
AIR CLEANER
NOTE:
WARNING
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in
the housing and latch the clips.
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
WARNING
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
WDI0712
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1
䊊
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover upward.
2. Remove the air cleaner filter.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
To replace the filter, perform the following procedure:
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WDI0619
LDI0387
1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins
A . Remove the glove box from the opening
䊊
and let it hang by the cord.
2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the
filter cover.
3. Remove the old in-cabin microfilters.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
LDI0404
NOTE:
The filters are marked with air flow arrows.
The end of the filter with the arrow should
face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows
should face downward.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.
LDI2486
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
B then move the wiper
2. Push the release tab 䊊
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
4. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide
it over to the right. Insert the second filter
into the housing.
C.
3. Remove the wiper blade from wiper arm 䊊
5. Install the filter cover.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
6. Install the glove box door.
7. Fill out the date information on the small
replacement label and attach it to the glove
box lid.
5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.
Self-adjusting brakes
CAUTION
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
WDI0629
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the windshield-washer nozzle
A . This may cause clogging or improper
䊊
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the
B.
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
FUSES
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate
maintenance schedule information in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
LDI0455
LDI0457
A is used in
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B is used in the passenger compartment fuse
䊊
box.
A fuse is used to replace a type 䊊
B fuse,
If a type 䊊
A fuse will not be level with the fuse
the type 䊊
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
Type 䊊
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
A fuses can be installed in the engine
Type 䊊
compartment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
B fuses cannot be installed in the underType 䊊
A fuses in the
hood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊
underhood fuse boxes.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
LDI2153
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LDI0456
A , replace it with a new
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
fuse 䊊
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
LDI2579
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.
LDI0381
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
LDI2580
1 .
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊
A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
equivalent good fuse 䊊
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
LDI0456
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to remove the extended storage
switch:
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LDI2035
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
1 found on each
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
2 .
fuse box 䊊
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as it could cause a malfunction.
● When changing the battery, do not let dust
or oil get on the key fob.
● There is danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
4
䊊
Close the lid securely.
button, then the
5. Press the
button two or three times to check the key
fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
LDI2026
KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
1
䊊
2
䊊
A.
Open the lid using a coin 䊊
B.
Remove the battery 䊊
3
䊊
C with the “+” facing
Install a new battery 䊊
down.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the
battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
● The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
LIGHTS
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This devise complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
● Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter
the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
NOTE:
Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart located in the “Exterior
and interior lights” section of this manual.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
NOTE:
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light
for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light
body and affect the performance of the
fog light.
To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Access
the aiming screw from underneath the front
bumper. The aiming screw is located on the
bottom of the fog light housing. Turn the
screw clockwise to raise the pattern. Turn
the screw counterclockwise to lower the
pattern.
LDI0382
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. The fog light is accessible in front of the front
tire and behind the bumper.
1 .
3. Disconnect the bulb connector 䊊
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog
light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the
bulb when removing it. Do not touch the
glass envelope.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly*
High
Low
Park/Turn
Sidemarker
Daytime running lights (Canada only)*
Front fog light (if so equipped)
Puddle light (if so equipped)
Map/room lights (front/rear) (if so equipped)
Personal lights (if so equipped)
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
Step light (if so equipped)
High-mounted stop light/cargo lights*
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop
Backup (reversing)
Turn
Tailgate light (if so equipped)*
License plate light
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
65
55
28/8
3.8
55
27.5
9
8
8
1.8
3.8
12.8
9005 (HB3)
9006 (HB4)
3457K
194
9006
880
906LF
–
AL67
–
194
912LF
27/8
18
27
18
5
3157K
921LF
3156K
921
W5W
* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
LDI2582
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Room/map light (if so equipped)
Personal lights (if so equipped)
Puddle light (if so equipped)
Step light (if so equipped)
License plate light
Rear combination/tailgate light (if so
equipped)
High-mount stoplight/cargo lights
Fog light (if so equipped)
Headlight assembly/daytime running
light (Canada only)
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
LDI0364
Personal lights (If so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
LDI0389
Interior/map lights
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LDI0385
Vanity mirror (If so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
LDI0341
Step light (If so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
LDI0388
Puddle light (If so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊
WDI0411
License plate light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual for additional information.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
LDI0410
Rear combination light
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all four tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the
vehicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on
the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights and Audible
Reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond
the specified capacity may also
result in failure of other vehicle
components.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
6
䊊
LDI2007
Tire and loading information label
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
4
䊊
Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: For additional information, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
5
䊊
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
recommended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Spare tire size.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
LDI0393
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Size
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P265/70R18
250 kPa, 36 PSI
P275/70R18
P275/60R20
Rear Original Tire:
P265/70R18
250 kPa, 36 PSI
P275/70R18
P275/60R20
Spare Tire:
P265/70R18
250 kPa, 36 PSI
P275/70R18
P275/60R20
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WDI0395
Example
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
䊊
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊
The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester
and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation pres䊊
sure
WDI0396
Example
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
䊊
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code:
identification mark.
Manufacturer’s
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
7 The word “radial”
䊊
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, includ-
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on P275/60R20 size tires. Installation of
the tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 size
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P265/70R18 size tires on
your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear
paved roads.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section in this manual for tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Wheel nut tightening torque:
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WDI0259
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain
clearance, speedometer calibration,
headlight aim and bumper height.
Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the
VDC system and/or interference with
the brake discs. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad wear. Refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual for wheel off-set dimensions.
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail without warning.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
Four-wheel drive models
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● The use of retread
recommended.
tires
is
not
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires on
the front and rear axles which will cause
excessive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and differential gears.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as necessary.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
9 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation
(without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel
recommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 9-18
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Crew Cab Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
King Cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-44
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-45
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
US measure
Imp measure
Fuel
28 gal
Engine oil
VK56DE
Cooling system
Transfer oil
23-1/4 gal
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Liter
105.8 L
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommendation (without Flexible
Fuel Vehicle Option)” or “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) Fuel Recommendation”
in this section.
Drain and refill
With oil filter
change
Without oil
filter change
With reservoir
6-7/8 qt
5-3/4 qt
6.5 L
6-1/2 qt
5-1/2 qt
6.2 L
3-1/4
2-5/8 gal
2-1/8 qt
1-3/4 qt
12.2 L
2.0 L
Automatic transmission fluid
Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
9-2 Technical and consumer information
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30
• For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended
•Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer case,
which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
•Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
•If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J
ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S or J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent
• DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
• Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
Capacity (Approximate)
US measure
Imp measure
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Liter
Front final drive oil
3-3/8 pt
2-7/8 pt
1.6 L
Rear final drive oil
4-1/4 pt
3-1/2 pt
2.0 L
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
—
—
—
Air conditioning system oil
—
—
—
1-1/4 gal
1 gal
4.5 L
Windshield-washer fluid
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API
GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90
• For hot climates, Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures
above 0° C (32° F).
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W-140 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140
• See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.
• NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label” in
this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label” in
this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze
or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 9-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (without
Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Reformulated gasoline
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
● If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no
more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may,
however, be added up to 15%.)
9-4 Technical and consumer information
● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
Octane rating tips
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Technical and consumer information 9-5
FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL
RECOMMENDATION (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular gasoline or any
percentage of the two fuels combined.
U.S. government regulations require Fuel
Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small,
square, orange and black label with the
common abbreviation or the appropriate
percentage for that region.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or
other damage can occur if E-85 is used in
vehicles that are not designed to run on
E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
● Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury.
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will cause
damage to the three-way catalyst.
● Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when removing the
fuel filler cap or filling the tank.
General information
● Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and
never use it near an open flame.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
● do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates
less than 1/4 full
● add more than 5 gallons of fuel
● operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes
NOTE:
WARNING
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol
may cause powertrain damage or a loss of
vehicle performance.
This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles (FFV)
only. FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel
filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel
vehicles.
For the best starting and vehicle driveability results, do not continually switch between E-85
and unleaded regular gasoline. If you must switch
fuels, NISSAN recommends the following:
Fuel requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least
87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91), or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
When the ambient temperature is above
90°F (32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to
32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in
the time it takes for you engine to start, and a
deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
Fuel consumption
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will experience an increase
in fuel consumption. You can expect your fuel
mileage to decrease by about 30% compared to
gasoline operation.
Replacement parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle
(FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced
with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION
Replacing fuel system components with
non-ethanol compatible components can
damage your vehicle and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
Maintenance
If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow
the correct maintenance log shown in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
CAUTION
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than
85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty
in cold starting and may affect drivability.
LTI2061
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants
and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in
order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
VK56DE
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°
in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)
cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)
1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2
Idle speed
A/T (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
No adjustment is necessary.
Standard Model
FFV Model
DILFR5A-11
DILFR5A-11D
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Technical and consumer information 9-9
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheels
18 x 8.0JJ
20 x 8.0JJ
Tires
P265/70R18
Overall length
Short wheel base (SWB)
Long wheel base (LWB)
Overall width
Overall height
King Cab - SWB
P275/70R18
Spare tire
P275/60R20
King Cab - LWB
Full size
Crew Cab - SWB
Crew Cab - LWB
Front Track
18 inch tire
20 inch tire
Rear Track
18 inch tire
20 inch tire
Wheelbase
Short wheel base
Long wheel base
9-10 Technical and consumer information
4x2 (S, SV)
4x4 (S, SV)
4x4 (Pro-4X)
4x2 (S, SV)
4x4 (S, SV)
4x2 (S, SV)
4x2 (SL)
4x4 (S, SV)
4x4 (Pro-4X)
4x4 (SL)
4x2 (S, SV)
4x2 (SL)
4x4 (S, SV)
4x4 (Pro-4X)
4x4 (SL)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
224.6 (5,704)
244.2 (6,204)
79.5 (2,019)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
74.6 (1,896)
76.1 (1,934)
76.6 (1,946)
74.4 (1,891)
76.0 (1,931)
74.7 (1,898)
75.1 (1,908)
76.3 (1,939)
76.9 (1,954)
76.7 (1,949)
74.7 (1,898)
74.9 (1,903)
76.3 (1,939)
76.6 (1,946)
76.4 (1,941)
in (mm)
in (mm)
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
in (mm)
in (mm)
67.9 (1,725)
68.1 (1,729)
in (mm)
in (mm)
139.8 (3,550)
159.5 (4,050)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
Refer to the “F.M.
V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label”
on the center pillar
between the driver’s side front and
rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and
registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility
of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for
any inconvenience that may result.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
LTI0085
LTI0086
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
WTI0095
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
WTI0099
WTI0189
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),
(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),
etc. Review it carefully.
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WTI0100
WTI0220
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
LTI0093
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in
(5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.
Install the license plate holder using the two
screws provided with the holder.
2. Mount the license plate using two M614 mm bolts.
License plate bolt tightening torque:
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)
9-14 Technical and consumer information
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
Both the GVWR and GAWR are located
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this section.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.
LTI0152
Example
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
LTI0102
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “Measurement of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
the “Tire and Loading Information label” in
this section.
SECURING THE LOAD
For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed
at each corner of the truck box. These may be
used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck
box.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
● Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage could
occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal injury.
WARNING
● Properly install and tighten the tiedown cleats into the Utili-track™ channel system. Also, do not attach any rope
or straps directly to the channel. Failure
to properly install the tie-down cleats or
attaching ropes or straps directly to the
channel can cause the cargo to become
unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
LTI0107
UTILI-TRACK™ CHANNEL SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
1. Side channels
2. Header channel
3. Channel sections
4. Floor channels
9-18 Technical and consumer information
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
The Utili-track™ channel system allows you to
move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best
location to secure a load.
The tie-down cleats must be installed so the
clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail.
If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches,
it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be
properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the
cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 inlbs)
Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat periodically during a trip to make sure the center bolt
has not become loose.
Install the tie-down cleat as follows:
1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding
them out the back of the truck bed. Properly
store the channel protectors.
2. Loosen the center bolt completely.
LTI0103
3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown. Then rotate the
cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the desired location.
LTI0104
4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom
fully seat into the channel detents.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
WTI0124
5. There should be no gap between the bottom
of the cleat and the top of the channel.
Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40 inlbs ).
9-20 Technical and consumer information
LTI0106
CAUTION
● Install only one cleat per section of
channel.
● Applying loads at angles to the cleats
greater then 45° or loads greater than
150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or
200 lbs. (side channels) may cause damage to the channel or bed.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
LTI0123
1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation
WARNING
Do not install accessories over the gap
between the front and rear side channels.
Doing this could affect the rear structure
in certain rear impacts, which could result
in serious injury.
WTI0119
CAUTION
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Use the channel end stoppers to help secure items in the channels from sliding off
the end of the truck bed.
Channel end stoppers
The channel end stoppers should be used to help
prevent accessories installed in the channels
from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck
bed.
They must be installed so they are properly
seated in the detents in the channel.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
INFORMATION
Install the channels end stoppers as follows:
1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding
them out the back of the truck bed. Properly
store the channel protectors.
2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the end
stopper with the provided wrench and insert
it into the channel.
3. Position the end stopper to the desired location on the channel so the nubs on the
bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the
channel detents.
4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the end
stopper with the provided wrench.
LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur,
or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal injury.
● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
CREW CAB MODELS
Crew Cab short wheel base models should
not be used to carry a slide-in camper.
KING CAB MODELS
This information is provided for you to properly
install a slide-in camper and is based on the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
regulations. It is recommended that, before installing the camper, you carefully read the following information and ensure that the camper
meets the specifications.
This information may not apply to some Canada
model vehicles.
SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES
Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or
camper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manual
does not cover these options. For additional information, refer to the body manufacturer’s instruction manual.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
WARNING
Improper loading may be dangerous. If a
load is too far back, it can affect handling
characteristics. If a load is too far forward,
the front axle may be overloaded.
WTI0195
LOCATION FOR CENTER OF
GRAVITY
The illustration indicates the recommended
cargo center of gravity location.
LTI0129
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,
the total cargo load of the truck consists of the
camper manufacturer’s weight figure, plus:
King Cab short wheel base:
● the weight of installed additional camper
equipment not included in the camper
manufacturer’s weight figure,
L1 = 43.9 in (1,115.7 mm)
● the weight of camper cargo,
Crew Cab long wheel base:
● and the weight of occupants in the camper.
L1 = 47.9 in (1,215.7 mm)
The total cargo load should not exceed the
truck’s pay load weight rating and the camper’s
center of gravity should fall within the truck’s
recommended center of gravity location when
installed.
9-24 Technical and consumer information
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance and may lead to
accidents.
VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY
The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label, refer to
“Tire and Loading Information label” in this section, indicates the maximum total weight of passengers, optional equipment (air conditioning,
trailer hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is
designed to carry.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you
do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your
vehicle. Refer to ’’Vehicle Loading Information’’ in
this section for details.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier load.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this section.
The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its
cargo weight.
● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
The maximum GCWR should not exceed the
value specified in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart.
WARNING
LTI0161
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
King pin load
When using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the tongue
load between 15 - 25% of the total trailer load
within the maximum king pin load limits shown in
the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart.
If the king pin load becomes excessive, rearrange
cargo to allow for proper king pin load.
WTI0160
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer
tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer.
The tongue load must be within the maximum
tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
CA0036
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.
9-28 Technical and consumer information
To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart found in
this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:
● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg).
● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 7,100 lb. (3,220 kg).
● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart 15,100 lb. (6,848 kg).
● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart - 9,200 lb.
(4,173 kg).
7,100 lb. (3,220 kg)
– 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg)
= 900 lb. (408 kg)
GVWR
GVW
Available for tongue/
king pin weight
15,100 lb. (6,848 kg)
GCWR
– 6,200 lb. (2,812 kg)
GVW
= 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg)
Capacity available for
towing
900 lb. (408 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 8,900 lb. (4,036 kg)
=
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
Towing load specification chart with tow package — short wheel base
2WD
Maximum Towing
Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum King pin load
Maximum Gross Combined
Weight Rating
KC
SV
9,500 lb.
(4,309 kg)
950 lb.
(431 kg)
1,425 lb.
(646 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
4WD
CC
SV
9,400 lb.
(4,263 kg)
940 lb.
(426 kg)
1,410 lb.
(639 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
KC
SL
9,200 lb.
(4,173 kg)
920 lb. (417 kg)
SV
9,400 lb. (4,263 kg)
1,380 lb.
(626 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
1,410 lb. (639 kg)
940 lb. (426 kg)
15,100 lb. (6,849 kg)
Pro-4X
9,300 lb.
(4,218 kg)
930 lb.
(422 kg)
1,395 lb.
(633 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
SV
9,300 lb.
(4,218 kg)
930 lb.
(422 kg)
1,395 lb.
(633 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
CC
Pro-4X
9,300 lb.
(4,218 kg)
930 lb.
(422 kg)
1,395 lb.
(633 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
SL
9,100 lb. (4,127 kg)
910 lb. (413 kg)
1,365 lb. (619 kg)
15,100 lb.
(6,849 kg)
Technical and consumer information 9-29
Towing load specification chart with tow package — long wheel base
Maximum Towing
Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum King pin load
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
2WD
CC
SV
9,300 lb. (4,218 kg)
4WD
CC
SV
9,100 lb. (4,127 kg)
930 lb. (422 kg)
1,395 lb. (633 kg)
15,100 lb. (6,848 kg)
910 lb. (413 kg)
1,365 lb. (619 kg)
15,100 lb. (6,848 kg)
Towing load specification chart without tow package — short wheel base
2WD
4WD
KC
Maximum Towing
capacity*1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2,
*3
Maximum King pin load
Maximum Gross Combined
Weight Rating
S
7,400 lb. (3,356 kg)
SV
7,400 lb. (3,356 kg)
740 lb. (336 kg)
740 lb. (336 kg)
1,110 lb. (504 kg)
1,110 lb. (504 kg)
12,800 lb. (5,806 kg)
12,800 lb. (5,806 kg)
9-30 Technical and consumer information
S
7,400 lb.
(3,356 kg)
740 lb.
(336 kg)
1,110 lb.
(504 kg)
12,800 lb.
(5,806 kg)
CC
SV
7,400 lb.
(3,356 kg)
740 lb.
(336 kg)
1,110 lb.
(504 kg)
12,800 lb.
(5,806 kg)
KC
SL
S
7,100 lb.
7,400 lb.
(3,220 kg) (3,356 kg)
710 lb.
740 lb.
(322 kg)
(336 kg)
1,065 lb.
1,110 lb.
(483 kg)
(504 kg)
12,800 lb. 13,000 lb.
(5,806 kg) (5,897 kg)
SV
7,400 lb.
(3,356 kg)
740 lb.
(336 kg)
1,110 lb.
(504 kg)
13,000 lb.
(5,897 kg)
S
7,300 lb.
(3,111 kg)
730 lb.
(311 kg)
1,095 lb.
(496 kg)
13,000 lb.
(5,897 kg)
CC
SV
7,300 lb.
(3,111 kg)
730 lb.
(311 kg)
1,095 lb.
(496 kg)
13,000 lb.
(5,897 kg)
SL
7,000 lb.
(3,175 kg)
700 lb.
(318 kg)
1,050 lb.
(476 kg)
13,000 lb.
(5,897 kg)
Towing load specification chart without tow package — long wheel base
Maximum Towing
capacity*1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum King pin load
Maximum Gross Combined
Weight Rating
2WD
CC
SV
7,100 lb. (3,220 kg)
4WD
CC
SV
7,000 lb. (3,175 kg)
710 lb. (322 kg)
1,065 lb. (483 kg)
12,800 lb. (5,806 kg)
700 lb. (318 kg)
1,050 lb. (476 kg)
13,000 lb. (5,897 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue load.
Technical and consumer information 9-31
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional
trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of
this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available
from your NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your
vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer
hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make
sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and gooseneck
trailers can also be installed on your vehicle.
Contact a professional supplier of towing equipment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitch installed.
9-32 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
● The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
● The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or
“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball
mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue weight
transferred through the frame and pushing down
on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow
vehicle.
LTI0131
Bumper towing
The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed
to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb
(2,268 kg).
To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the
A , then remove it to
center of the step bumper 䊊
install the trailer hitch ball.
Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of
tongue weight and gross weight directly on the
ball mount and on the receiver.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is
recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a
maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
Check with the trailer and towing equipment
manufacturers to determine if they recommend
the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If
you are considering use of a weightdistributing hitch system with a surge
brake-equipped trailer, check with the
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer
to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weightdistributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition on and the doors closed,
allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes
so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on
the front and rear bumpers at the center of
the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust
the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper
height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of
the reference height measured in step 2. The
rear bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If the
rear bumper is higher than the measured
reference height when loaded, the vehicle
may handle unpredictably which could
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-33
Sway control device
Class IV hitch
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). A
weight distributing hitch should be used to tow
trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).
9-34 Technical and consumer information
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb
(4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum
trailer weights shown in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart in this section.
5th wheel/gooseneck
A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed by
installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch.
These types of hitches are mounted in the bed of
the pick-up. A professional trailer equipment supplier should install these hitches as it is very
important to mount the hitch correctly to distribute the king pin weight for the proper load carrying and sway control performance.
The king pin weight should be 15 to 25 % of the
fully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pin weight
does not cause the gross vehicle weight to exceed the Gross Maximum Weight Rating or the
rear axle weight to exceed the Rear Gross Axle
Weight rating. For additional information, refer to
“Maximum load limits” in this section.
The weight of the trailer should not exceed the
maximum towing capacity for the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Towing
Load/Specification” chart in this section.
Make sure the trailer design allows for the correct
vehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a
5th wheel trailer.
CAUTION
● Special hitches which include frame reinforcements are required for towing
above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and
hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport
utility vehicles are available at a
NISSAN dealer.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
● When towing with the hitch ball
mounted to the rear bumper, do not
make sharp turns. The trailer may contact the bumper and cause damage to
the bumper or trailer.
● When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do not
make sharp turns while driving or backing. The trailer may contact the vehicle
and cause damage to both the trailer
and vehicle.
Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch
ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more that
15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that
exceeds these power requirements may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the
proper equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the
optional trailer tow package are equipped with a
7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is
equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter
will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the
vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN dealers, auto parts stores and hitch retailers.
Trailer brakes
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used. However, most states
require a separate braking system on trailers with
a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make
sure the trailer meets the local regulations and
the regulations where you plan to tow.
Several types of braking systems are available.
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line
running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are
activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch
ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic
surge brakes are common on rental trailers and
some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is
no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent
from a trailer brake controller (special brakesensing module). For additional information, refer
to “Electric trailer brake controller” in this section.
Technical and consumer information 9-35
Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly
installed and demonstrate proper brake function
testing.
To install the electric trailer brake controller
jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the
rearmost position.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
LTI0117
example
Electric trailer brake controller
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may require the installation of an aftermarket trailer
brake controller.
Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and
jumper harness that is specifically designed to be
used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.
9-36 Technical and consumer information
Wire color designation for electric trailer brake
controller jumper harness.
WIRE COLOR
RED/GREEN
BLACK
BROWN/WHITE
RED/BLUE
RED
LTI0118
LTI0115
2. Apply the parking brake to access the
jumper harness connector.
3. Locate the jumper harness connector under
the lower portion of the instrument panel.
The connector is taped to the wiring harness
1 as indicated.
䊊
NOTE
Vehicle stop lamp switch
to trailer brake controller.
Brake controller ground
(-).
Trailer brake controller
switched output.
Trailer brake controller
illumination.
Fused trailer brake controller battery feed (B+).
● The connector is marked with a white tag
with “elec brake conn”.
Technical and consumer information 9-37
Pre-towing tips
● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
LTI0116
4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper
2 .
harness to the connector 䊊
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake
controller according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
9-38 Technical and consumer information
● Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
● When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
section and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in
the “Starting and driving” section.
7. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
4. Release the parking brake.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
indicator light (if so
6. Make sure the
equipped) indicates the transfer case is in
4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If
indicator light is flashing, or the
the
ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission
is in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switch
to 2WD or 4H. For additional information,
refer to “Automatic transmission park warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
● While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or
repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
● Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Technical and consumer information 9-39
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight
ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.
● Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
9-40 Technical and consumer information
● Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
● NISSAN recommends that the cruise control (if so equipped) not be used while towing a trailer.
● Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
Tow mode
Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a
heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the
TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The
indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow mode is selected. Press the
TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.
Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
Tow mode includes the following features:
● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts
when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a
grade.
● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automatically downshifts when driving down a grade
with a trailer or heavy load to help control
vehicle speed.
● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section in this manual.
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no
trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause
any damage. However, fuel economy may be
reduced and the transmission/engine driving
characteristics may feel unusual.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section in this manual.
SNOW PLOW
FLAT TOWING
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
WARNING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Automatic Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle
handling. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Technical and consumer information 9-41
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
9-42 Technical and consumer information
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra
(French speakers)
For Canada
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from
Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French
speakers).
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.
You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/
7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng
(English speakers) or
Technical and consumer information 9-43
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. If the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink
after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the
“ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for
testing.
9-44 Technical and consumer information
● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
year and prior can be purchased. A genuine
NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
service and repair information for your vehicle.
This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please contact your nearest
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the
NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122
and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist
you.
Technical and consumer information 9-45
MEMO
9-46 Technical and consumer information
10 Index
4WD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
4-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
A
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-35
Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-17
Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-65, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-14
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-25
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-27
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-34
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
AM-FM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Audio System
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Audio system
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-65
Audio System
Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . .4-64, 4-65
Audio system
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . .4-37, 4-41, 4-46, 4-53
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35, 4-39
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43, 4-48
Audio System
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58, 4-61
iPod® player operation . . . . . . .4-58, 4-61
Audio system
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-67
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-56
Audio System
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-56
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . .3-25, 3-26, 3-27
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-56
Automatic transmission position indicator
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-18
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-16
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-25, 3-26, 3-27
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-42, 4-54
B
Back button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39, 8-15
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement
Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-65
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-34
Brake assist (for Intelligent cruise control
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-22
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . .9-2
Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .9-15
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
CD player
(See audio system) . . . . .4-37, 4-41, 4-46, 4-53
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-24, 1-24, 1-25, 1-27
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
10-2
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-46
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36, 4-40
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-40
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Clock set/adjustment. . . . .4-7, 4-36, 4-40, 4-44
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37, 4-41, 4-46, 4-53
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
With navigation system . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-5
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-67
Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-25
Heater and air conditioner controls
(manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20, 5-21
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-62
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-35
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Digital video disc DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-36
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20, 2-21
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-4
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . .3-25, 3-26, 3-27
Driving
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14
Precautions when starting and
driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-7
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission control information label . . . . .
Emission control system warranty . . . . .
Engine
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . .
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .5-24
. .5-31
. .2-39
. .9-13
. .9-42
. .5-11
. .5-41
. . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment check locations . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant
temperature high warning light . . . . . . . .
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . .
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . . .
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . .
. .8-8
.8-10
.8-12
. .8-8
. .8-9
. .8-6
. .2-5
. .8-7
. .8-9
. .9-7
. .2-7
. .9-8
.9-13
. .9-9
.5-12
. .2-5
. .2-7
.2-14
. .4-4
.9-44
. .5-2
. .8-2
.8-26
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . .
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . .
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . .
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) .
Front power seat adjustment . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel-filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . .
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . .
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .8-9
.8-13
.8-14
.9-13
.2-37
.5-24
. . . . .1-57
. . . . . .1-4
. . . . . .1-2
Fuel gauge . . . .
Odometer . . . .
Speedometer . .
Tachometer . . .
Trip odometer . .
Voltmeter . . . . .
General maintenance
Glove box. . . . . . .
Grocery hooks . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .2-6
. .2-4
. .2-4
. .2-5
. .2-4
. .2-7
. .8-2
.2-48
.2-53
H
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .9-2
.5-24
.3-11
.3-11
. .2-6
. .9-5
. .9-4
.2-26
.3-11
. .2-6
.8-23
.8-25
F
G
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-61, 2-62, 2-63, 2-64, 2-64, 2-65
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Gauge
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-32
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Headphones (See NISSAN mobile
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-25
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-25
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . .4-24
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-61, 2-62, 2-63, 2-64, 2-64, 2-65
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
10-3
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 5-11
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-13
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20, 2-21
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-16
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-36
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58, 4-61
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-17
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Keyless entry
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . .3-7
Keys
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-2
10-4
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-14
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-13
Emission control information label . . . . .9-13
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-13
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-14
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-12
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-65
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-17
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-32
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-26
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-59
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Lights
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-15, 2-17, 2-26
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-26
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-15
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25, 3-26, 3-27
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-36
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-16
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
N
NISSAN mobile entertainment system
(MES) . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-70, 4-71, 4-72, 4-76
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-28, 5-11
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . . .4-98
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-7
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant
temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-14
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-93
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Pedal position adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-44
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-44
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Precautions on booster
seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-46
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-46
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Precautions when starting and
driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-7
Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-64
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
R
Radio
AM-FM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-79
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43, 4-48
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-67
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
RearView Monitor . . . . . .4-10, 4-11, 4-13, 4-14
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-12
Remote controller (See NISSAN mobile
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-43
10-5
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Child seat belts . . . . .1-25, 1-32, 1-39, 1-46
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-43
Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainment
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Seat belt
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-64
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14, 7-5
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-20
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-17
Two-point type without retractor
(rear center lap belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-17, 2-17
Seats
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Automatic drive positioner. . .3-25, 3-26, 3-27
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
10-6
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 5-11
Security systems
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-27, 2-27
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Shifting
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . .5-14, 5-16
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-20
Side air bag system (See supplemental side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-62
Sonar
Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-17
Precautions when starting and
driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-7
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Steering
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-67
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Lockable bedside storage compartment . .2-54
Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-50
Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-65
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-65, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-57
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-65
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-50
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-56
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-32
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-36
Pedal position adjustment switch. . . . . .3-14
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-41
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Steering wheel switch for audio
control/Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch .
. .4-67
. .2-42
. .2-36
. .2-39
. .2-30
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Tailgate latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant
temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-14
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 5-11
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-14
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-41
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . .2-61, 2-62, 2-63, 2-64,
2-64, 2-65
Transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Transmission
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-14
Shift selector lock release . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice recognition
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-56
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-57
Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . .5-24
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-10
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-39
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-36
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . .5-36
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-12
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . .2-28, 5-11
Vehicle Information Display. . . . . . . .2-20, 2-21
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-27, 2-27
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
immobilizer system), engine start . . . .2-28, 5-11
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . .4-82, 4-93
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
W
Warning
4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-65, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
10-7
Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant
temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-14
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-15, 2-17, 2-26
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-26
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-59
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . .1-17, 2-17
Supplemental air bag warning light .1-65, 2-17
TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . .2-27, 2-27
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-65
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-18
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-30
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-10
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-56
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56
Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
10-8
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch . .
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . .
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .8-14
. . .2-30
. . .8-21
. . .2-30
. . .8-21
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL (without
Flexible Fuel Vehicle [FFV] option):
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so
equipped):
If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel
vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to use
(E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular
gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined.
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
● Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent.
● Engine oil with API Certification Mark.
● Viscosity SAE 5W-30
For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and
oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
Printing : May 2015 (21)
OM15EA
0A60U1
Publication No.: OM1E
0A60U0
Printed in U.S.A.
A60-D
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising